EP3695974A1 - Printing-fluid cartridge, set of printing-fluid cartridges, and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus - Google Patents
Printing-fluid cartridge, set of printing-fluid cartridges, and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- EP3695974A1 EP3695974A1 EP20159598.0A EP20159598A EP3695974A1 EP 3695974 A1 EP3695974 A1 EP 3695974A1 EP 20159598 A EP20159598 A EP 20159598A EP 3695974 A1 EP3695974 A1 EP 3695974A1
- Authority
- EP
- European Patent Office
- Prior art keywords
- printing
- cartridge
- ink
- fluid
- light
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 title claims abstract description 308
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 365
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 365
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 169
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 37
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 75
- 239000003570 air Substances 0.000 description 42
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 37
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 28
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 27
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 27
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 18
- 238000000638 solvent extraction Methods 0.000 description 17
- 230000002159 abnormal effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000005055 memory storage Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000007789 sealing Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 5
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000005484 gravity Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000011347 resin Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229920005989 resin Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000012080 ambient air Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229920001971 elastomer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000149 penetrating effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000049 pigment Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000002238 attenuated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000006229 carbon black Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000052 comparative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013013 elastic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000806 elastomer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000005192 partition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 1
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/17506—Refilling of the cartridge
- B41J2/17509—Whilst mounted in the printer
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/17513—Inner structure
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/1752—Mounting within the printer
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/1752—Mounting within the printer
- B41J2/17523—Ink connection
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/17543—Cartridge presence detection or type identification
- B41J2/17546—Cartridge presence detection or type identification electronically
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17503—Ink cartridges
- B41J2/17553—Outer structure
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/005—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by bringing liquid or particles selectively into contact with a printing material
- B41J2/01—Ink jet
- B41J2/17—Ink jet characterised by ink handling
- B41J2/175—Ink supply systems ; Circuit parts therefor
- B41J2/17596—Ink pumps, ink valves
Definitions
- the present disclosure relates to a printing-fluid cartridge, a set of the printing-fluid cartridges, and a system including a printing-fluid consuming apparatus and the printing-fluid cartridge mountable in the printing-fluid consuming apparatus.
- inkjet recording apparatuses configured to record images on recording mediums by ejecting ink stored in ink cartridges through nozzles.
- inkjet recording apparatus in which a new ink cartridge is mountable every time ink is consumed.
- a plurality of ink cartridges can be mountable.
- Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2007-261286 discloses an ink cartridge that is provided with information memory storage that stores information relating to ink stored in the ink cartridge.
- the information relating to ink may include, for example, a manufacturing date, a model number, and a residual amount of ink.
- the information memory storage electrically contacts a connection terminal to allow the information about the ink stored in the information memory storage to be read out.
- ink in terms of color or component there are various types of ink in terms of color or component, for example.
- a user may attempt to insert an ink cartridge into an incorrect location in the inkjet recording apparatus.
- an ink cartridge storing black ink may be erroneously inserted into a position into which an ink cartridge storing yellow ink should be inserted.
- information of an ink color is stored in the information memory storage
- information relating to ink is read out from the information memory storage of the erroneously attached ink cartridge, thereby enabling a determination that the ink cartridge is attached to an incorrect position.
- black ink may flow out from the black ink cartridge and may be mixed with yellow ink that exists at a connection part of the inkjet recording apparatus.
- the ink cartridge may be provided with a particular portion whose shape serves as a key that corresponds to a shape (concave or convex shape, for example) indicative of the correct location in the inkjet recording apparatus so as to prevent connection of a wrong ink cartridge to the connection part.
- the concavo or convex shape provided in a correct location may be brought into contact with the information memory storage of the ink cartridge being inserted.
- electrodes of the information memory storage may be damaged and, in a worst case, information stored in the information memory storage cannot become read out therefrom.
- the locking surface cannot engage with the lock portion, a wrongly inserted printing-fluid cartridge cannot be attached to the cartridge-attachment section.
- the user can realize that the incorrect insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge, and the user is encouraged to insert the printing-fluid cartridge into the correct insertion space.
- the structure according to the present disclosure can prevent wrong insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the cartridge-attachment section of the printing-fluid consuming apparatus.
- a frontward direction 51 is defined as a direction in which an ink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment is inserted into a cartridge-attachment section 110
- a rearward direction 52 is defined as a direction opposite the frontward direction 51, that is, a direction in which the ink cartridge 30 is extracted from the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the frontward direction 51 and rearward direction 52 are horizontal in the present embodiment.
- a downward direction 53 is defined as a direction perpendicular to the frontward direction 51 or the rearward direction 52, while an upward direction 54 is defined as a direction opposite the downward direction 53.
- a rightward direction 55 and a leftward direction 56 are defined as directions perpendicular to the frontward direction 51 and the downward direction 53. The rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56 are also parallel to a horizontal plane in the present embodiment.
- the downward direction 53 is coincident with a direction of a gravitational force acting on the ink cartridge 30 (i.e. gravitational direction), and the upward direction 54 is coincident with a direction opposite to the gravitational direction.
- the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56 are defined as directions perpendicular to the frontward direction 51 and the downward direction 53.
- the rightward direction 55 is a direction toward the right and the leftward direction 56 is a direction toward the left when the ink cartridge 30 is viewed from a rear side thereof.
- a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 or a state where the ink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by the printer 10 implies a state of the ink cartridge 30 when the ink cartridge 30 has been completely inserted into an attachment position in the cartridge attachment section 110.
- a posture of the ink cartridge 30 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge attachment section 110 or a state where the ink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by the printer 10 will be referred to as an "attached posture.”
- the ink cartridge 30 has a height in the gravitational direction; a depth in the frontward direction 51 or in the rearward direction 52 (i.e., insertion direction) which is orthogonal to the gravitational direction; and a width in the rightward direction 55 or in the leftward direction 56 (i.e., widthwise direction) which is orthogonal to the gravitational direction (height) and the insertion direction (depth).
- the frontward direction 51 and the rearward direction 52 may be collectively referred to as a front-rear direction.
- the upward direction 54 and the downward direction 53 may be collectively referred to as an up-down direction.
- the rightward direction 55 and the leftward direction 56 may be collectively referred to as a left-right direction.
- facing frontward includes facing in a direction including a frontward component
- facing rearward includes facing in a direction including a rearward component
- facing downward includes facing in a direction including a downward component
- facing upward includes facing in a direction including an upward component.
- a front surface faces frontward denotes that the front surface may face in a frontward direction, or the front surface may face in a direction inclined relative to the frontward direction.
- Fig. 1 shows a system 1 configured of a printer 10 and the ink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment. First, a detailed structure of the printer 10 according to the embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 1 .
- the printer 10 is configured to form an image by selectively ejecting ink droplets onto a sheet based on an inkjet recording system. As illustrated in Fig. 1 , the printer 10 includes a recording head 21, an ink-supplying device 100, and ink tubes 20 connecting the recording head 21 to the ink-supplying device 100.
- the ink-supplying device 100 includes the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the cartridge-attachment section 110 can detachably accommodate a plurality of ink cartridges 30 therein.
- ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K each storing ink of one of four colors of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black can be mounted in corresponding insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K may be referred to as “ink cartridge 30” or "ink cartridges 30" when no color distinction is necessary.
- the insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K of the cartridge-attachment section 110 may be referred to as “insertion space 111" or "insertion spaces 111" when no color distinction is necessary.
- the cartridge-attachment section 110 has a wall formed with an opening 112.
- the ink cartridges 30 can be inserted into the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the frontward direction 51 (i.e., insertion direction orthogonal to the gravitational direction) through the opening 112, and extracted from the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the rearward direction 52 (i.e., removal direction orthogonal to the gravitational direction) through the opening 112.
- Each ink cartridge 30 stores ink therein that the printer 10 can use for printing.
- the ink cartridges 30 are connected to the recording head 21 through the corresponding ink tubes 20 when the ink cartridges 30 are completely mounted in the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the recording head 21 includes sub tanks 28 each serving to temporarily store ink supplied from the corresponding ink cartridge 30 through the corresponding ink tube 20.
- the recording head 21 also includes a plurality of nozzles 29 through which the ink supplied from the sub tanks 28 is selectively ejected in accordance with the inkjet recording system. More specifically, the recording head 21 includes a head control board (not shown), and piezoelectric elements 29A each corresponding to one of the nozzles 29.
- the head control board is configured to selectively apply drive voltages to the piezoelectric elements 29A to eject ink of each color selectively from the nozzles 29. In this way, the recording head 21 is configured to consume the ink stored in the respective ink cartridges 30 mounted in the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the printer 10 also includes a sheet tray 15, a sheet feeding roller 23, a conveying path 24, a pair of conveying rollers 25, a platen 26, a pair of discharge rollers 27, and a sheet discharge tray 16.
- the sheets from the sheet tray 15 are fed by the sheet feeding roller 23 onto the conveying path 24, and then conveyed by the conveying rollers 25 onto the platen 26.
- the recording head 21 is configured to selectively eject ink onto the sheets as the sheets move over the platen 26, thereby recording images on the sheets.
- the sheets that have passed the platen 26 are then discharged by the discharge rollers 27 onto the sheet discharge tray 16 disposed at a downstream end of the conveying path 24.
- the ink-supplying device 100 is provided in the printer 10, as illustrated in Fig. 1 .
- the ink-supplying device 100 functions to supply ink to the recording head 21.
- the ink-supplying device 100 includes the cartridge-attachment section 110 for detachably receive the ink cartridges 30 therein.
- Fig. 1 depicts a state where one of the ink cartridges 30 has been completely received in the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the ink cartridge 30 depicted in Fig. 1 is in the attached posture in which the ink cartridge 30 is used by the printer 10.
- the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K (the four kinds of ink cartridges 30 corresponding to the colors of cyan, magenta, yellow and black) are detachably mountable.
- the cartridge-attachment section 110 includes a case 101, and four sets of an ink needle 102, a tank 103, an optical sensor 113, four contacts 106, a rod 125, a positioning portion 107 and a gate 108, each set for each of the four ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K.
- the case 101 constitutes a housing of the cartridge-attachment section 110. As depicted in Fig. 2 , the case 101 has a box-like shape defining an internal space therein. Specifically, the case 101 includes a top wall defining a ceiling of the internal space, a bottom wall defining a bottom of the internal space, an end wall connecting the top wall and the bottom wall, and the opening 112 positioned opposite the end wall in the front-rear direction. The opening 112 can be exposed to a surface (user-interface surface) that a user can face when using the printer 10.
- the four kinds of ink cartridges 30 can be inserted into and removed from the case 101 through the opening 112.
- the bottom wall is formed with four guide grooves 109 for guiding insertion/removal of the corresponding ink cartridges 30.
- the case 101 includes three plates 104 that partition the internal space into the four insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K.
- the respective insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K are elongated in the up-down direction 53 and 54.
- the four kinds of ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K can be mounted in the four insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K, respectively.
- the ink cartridge 30C is adapted to be inserted into the insertion space 111C.
- the ink cartridge 30M is adapted to be inserted into the insertion space 111M.
- the ink cartridge 30Y is adapted to be inserted into the insertion space 111Y.
- the ink cartridge 30K is adapted to be inserted into the insertion space 111K.
- the ink cartridge 30M is interposed between the ink cartridges 30C and 30Y in the left-right direction.
- the ink cartridge 30K has a left-right dimension larger than a left-right dimension of each of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, and 30Y, as will be described later.
- the insertion space 111K has a left-right dimension that is larger than a left-right dimension of each of the insertion spaces 111C, 111M and 111Y.
- Each ink needle 102 is formed of a resin and has a generally hollow tubular shape. As illustrated in Fig. 2 , the ink needles 102 are disposed at a lower end portion of the end wall constituting the case 101. Specifically, each ink needle 102 is disposed at a position corresponding to an ink supply potion 34 (described later) of the corresponding ink cartridge 30 mounted in the cartridge-attachment section 110. The respective ink needles 102 protrude rearward from the end wall of the case 101. The ink needle 102 has a distal end 102E facing rearward.
- a cylindrical-shaped guide portion 105 is provided at the end wall to surround each of the ink needles 102. Each guide portion 105 protrudes rearward from the end wall. Each guide portion 105 has a protruding end that is open rearward. Specifically, each ink needle 102 is positioned at a diametrical center of the corresponding guide portion 105. Each guide portion 105 is shaped to allow the ink supply potion 34 of the corresponding ink cartridge 30 to be received in the corresponding guide portion 105.
- the ink supply potion 34 of the ink cartridge 30 enters into the corresponding guide portion 105 (refer to Fig. 4 ).
- the ink needle 102 enters into an ink supply port 71 of the corresponding ink supply potion 34.
- the ink needle 102 is thus connected to the corresponding ink supply potion 34 to allow communication with each other.
- the ink stored in a second ink chamber 33 formed inside the ink cartridge 30 is allowed to flow into the corresponding tank 103 through an ink valve chamber 35 defined in the ink supply potion 34 and an inner space defined in the corresponding ink needle 102.
- each ink needle 102 may have a flat shape or a pointed shape.
- the guide portions 105 may be formed into any shape, provided that the guide portions 105 can allow attachment of the ink cartridges 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the guide portions 105 need not necessarily be provided in the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- a set of the four contacts 106 is provided for each of the four insertion spaces 111 of the case 101.
- the contacts 106 are provided in a holder (not shown) that is supported by the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- each of the four sets of the contacts 106 is disposed at the top wall of the case 101, for each insertion space 111, at a position near the end wall of the case 101.
- Each set of the four contacts 106 is disposed rearward relative to the corresponding ink needle 102.
- Each of the four contacts 106 protrude from a lower surface of the top wall downward toward the corresponding insertion space 111 of the case 101.
- each set are arranged to be spaced apart from one another in the left-right direction.
- the four contacts 106 in each set are arranged at positions respectively corresponding to four electrodes 65 provided at each of the ink cartridges 30, as will be described later.
- Each contact 106 is formed of a material having electrical conductivity and resiliency. The contacts 106 are therefore upwardly resiliently deformable.
- the four sets of the four contacts 106 are disposed each set for each of the four ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K in the present embodiment. That is, a total of sixteen contacts 106 are provided at the case 101.
- the number of contacts 106 and the number of electrodes 65 may be arbitrary.
- Each contact 106 is electrically connected to an arithmetic-logic unit via an electrical circuit.
- each contact 106 is connected to a controller 117 (see Fig. 1 ) provided in the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the controller 117 may include a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, for example.
- the contacts 106 are engaged with the corresponding electrodes 65 when the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the case 101.
- the contacts 106 are electrically connected to the corresponding electrodes 65, so that a voltage Vc is applied to one of the electrodes 65; another one of the electrodes 65 is grounded; signals are exchanged between the controller 117 and another one of the electrodes 65; and power is supplied to another one of the electrodes 65.
- the controller 117 Due to establishment of the electrical connection between the contacts 106 and the electrodes 65, the controller 117 is electrically accessible to the data stored in an IC of each ink cartridge 30. Outputs from the respective contacts 106 through the electrical circuits are configured to be inputted into the controller 117.
- each rod 125 is provided at the end wall of the case 101 at a position upward of the corresponding ink needle 102 for each insertion space 111.
- Each rod 125 has a generally cylindrical shape and protrudes rearward from the end wall of the case 101.
- each optical sensor 113 is disposed at the top wall of the case 101. Specifically, each optical sensor 113 is disposed, for each insertion space 111, at a position rearward of the corresponding rod 125 but frontward of the set of four contacts 106. Each optical sensor 113 includes a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion. The light-emitting portion is arranged to oppose the light-receiving portion and is spaced apart from the light-receiving portion in the left-right direction.
- a light-blocking plate 67 of the attached ink cartridge 30 is located between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the corresponding optical sensor 113.
- the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion are arranged to oppose each other with the light-blocking plate 67 of the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 interposed between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion.
- the optical sensor 113 is configured to output different detection signals depending on whether or not light emitted in the left-right direction from the light-emitting portion is received by the light-receiving portion. For example, the optical sensor 113 outputs a low-level signal when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is not received at the light-receiving portion (that is, when an intensity of the light received at the light-receiving portion is less than a predetermined intensity). On the other hand, the optical sensor 113 outputs a high-level signal when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is received by the light-receiving portion (that is, when the intensity of the received light is equal to or greater than the predetermined intensity).
- a lock shaft 145 is also provided at the case 101.
- the lock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction at a position near the top wall and the opening 112 of the case 101.
- the lock shaft 145 is disposed rearward of the contacts 106.
- the lock shaft 145 is a rod-like member extending in the left-right direction.
- the lock shaft 145 is a columnar-shaped metal.
- the lock shaft 145 has both ends that are fixed to walls defining both ends of the case 101 in the left-right direction. Accordingly, the lock shaft 145 is not movable (for example, is not pivotable) relative to the case 101.
- the lock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction across the four insertion spaces 111 respectively corresponding to the four ink cartridges 30. In each of the insertion spaces 111, a space is provided around the lock shaft 145. Thus, a locking surface 151 (described later) of each ink cartridge 30 can access the lock shaft 145 by moving upward or rearward.
- the lock shaft 145 functions to maintain the ink cartridges 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the attached state.
- the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge-attachment section 110 and pivoted into a posture to be used thereby (i.e., attached posture)
- the ink cartridge 30 is brought into engagement with the lock shaft 145 in the corresponding insertion space 111.
- the lock shaft 145 holds the ink cartridge 30 in the attached posture in the cartridge-attachment section 110 against urging forces of coil springs 78 and 98 (described later) of the ink cartridge 30 that push the ink cartridge 30 as a whole rearward.
- the positioning portions 107 are arranged near the top wall of the case 101. Each positioning portion 107 is disposed between the corresponding set of contacts 106 and the lock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction. The positioning portions 107 protrude downward from the top wall of the case 101. The positioning portions 107 are integrally formed with the case 101. Each positioning portion 107 has a lower end surface that is configured to abut against a contact surface 84 of the corresponding ink cartridge 30 in the state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 (in the attached posture). The lower end surface of each positioning portion 107 is positioned slightly upward relative to the lower ends of the corresponding contacts 106.
- each gate 108 (specifically, gates 108C, 108M, 108Y and 108K) are provided near the top wall of the case 101. Each gate 108 protrudes downward from a wall defining an upper edge of each insertion space 111. Each gate 108 is provided for each insertion space 111 at a position between the corresponding optical sensor 113 and the set of contacts 106 in the front-rear direction. Referring to Fig. 3 , each gate 108 includes a pair of opposing walls 118 and a slit 119 provided between the opposing walls 118.
- the opposing walls 118 extend respectively in the left-right direction from neighboring partitioning members that oppose each other in the right-left direction and that define the corresponding insertion space 111, such as the neighboring two plates 104.
- the opposing walls 118 extend in the up-down direction and are paired to oppose each other in the left-right direction with a gap defined therebetween. This gap between the paired opposing walls 118 serve as the slit 119 in each gate 108.
- each slit 119 is defined by two opposing end faces of the paired opposing walls 118 extending in the up-down direction.
- the slits 119 are formed at different positions from one another in the left-right direction in the respective insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K. Specifically, relative positions between the slits 119 (slits 119C, 119M, 119Y and 119K) and the corresponding contacts 106 in the respective insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K in the left-right direction are different from one another. More specifically, for example, referring to Fig.
- the slit 119M of the gate 108M is positioned at a generally left-right center of the insertion space 111M
- the slit 119C of the gate 108C is positioned offset from a left-right center of the insertion space 111C (i.e., rightward relative to the left-right center of the insertion space 111C).
- the respective slits 119C, 119M, 119Y and 119K in the insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K are formed at such left-right positions that correspond to left-right positions of the light-blocking plates 67 (67C, 67M, 67Y and 67K) of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K, respectively.
- Each slit 119 has a width in the left-right direction that is larger than a width of the corresponding light-blocking plate 67 in the left-right direction (defined as a width W1 illustrated in Figs. 14 and 15 ). That is, the light-blocking plates 67C, 67M, 67Y and 67K are allowed to pass through the corresponding slits 119C, 119M, 119Y and 119K in the front-rear direction.
- each tank 103 is provided forward of the case 101 and is connected to the corresponding ink needle 102.
- the tank 103 has a box-like shape that allows ink to be stored therein.
- An atmosphere communication port 124 is formed at an upper portion of each tank 103 so that the tank 103 can be opened to the atmosphere through the atmosphere communication port 124.
- the tank 103 has an inner space that communicates with the inner space of the ink needle 102. With this structure, ink can flow out from the ink cartridge 30 through the ink needle 102 and is stored in the tank 103.
- Each tank 103 is also connected to the corresponding ink tube 20. Thus, the ink stored in the inner space of each tank 103 is supplied to the recording head 21 through the corresponding ink tube 20.
- the cartridge-attachment section 110 also includes a cover 114, and a cover sensor 115.
- the cover 114 is configured to open and close the opening 112 of the case 101.
- the cover 114 extends in the left-right direction.
- the cover 114 is pivotally movable relative to the case 101 about a shaft 116 provided near a lower end of the case 101.
- the cover 114 has a substantially flat-plate shape and constitutes a part of the outer surface of the printer 10.
- the cover sensor 115 is configured to detect whether or not the cover 114 is in a closing position that closes the opening 112.
- the cover 114 is at the closing position.
- the cover 114 at the closing position extends upward relative to the shaft 116.
- the opening 112 of the case 101 is closed.
- a user cannot perform insertion and removal of the ink cartridges 30 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the cover sensor 115 is disposed at such a position that the cover sensor 115 can detect presence of a portion of the cover 114 at the closing position. To move the cover 114 from the closing position to an opening position opening the opening 112, the cover 114 is pivoted about the shaft 116 to move an upper end portion of the cover 114 downward.
- the cover 114 at the opening position extends substantially horizontally in the rearward direction 52 relative to the shaft 116.
- the cover 114 When the cover 114 is pivoted from the closing position toward the opening position, the cover 114 goes out of a range within which the cover sensor 115 can detect the cover 114.
- the opening 112 of the case 101 is opened. In this state, the user can insert/remove the ink cartridges 30 into/from the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the cartridge-attachment section 110 also includes a controller 117.
- the controller 117 is an arithmetic-logic unit including a CPU, a memory, and the like, for example.
- the controller 117 may be configured as a controller of the printer 10.
- the controller 117 is configured to receive signals outputted from the optical sensor 113 and the cover sensor 115.
- the controller 117 is configured to determine a type of the ink cartridge 30 inserted into the insertion space 111 based on a signal outputted from the optical sensor 113. Details of the detection performed by the controller 117 will be described later.
- the ink cartridge 30 is a container configured to store ink therein.
- the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K have generally the same structure as each other, but have some differences from one another.
- the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into and attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in a posture illustrated in Figs. 4 to 10 .
- This posture of the ink cartridge 30 in the attached state will also be called an upright posture, hereinafter, whenever necessary. That is, the upright posture corresponds to the attached posture.
- the ink cartridge 30 is in the upright posture when the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the ink stored in the first ink chamber 32 of the ink cartridge 30 can flow out therefrom to be supplied into the corresponding ink needle 102 through the ink supply port 71 of the ink supply potion 34. That is, the ink cartridge 30 can be used in the printer 10 when in the attached posture or in the upright posture.
- the ink cartridge 30 includes a front wall 40, a rear wall 41, an upper wall 39, and a bottom wall 42.
- a direction from the rear wall 41 toward the front wall 40 coincides with the frontward direction 51; a direction from the front wall 40 toward the rear wall 41 coincides with the rearward direction 52; a direction from the upper wall 39 toward the bottom wall 42 coincides with the downward direction 53, and a direction from the bottom wall 42 toward the upper wall 39 coincides with the upward direction 54.
- the front wall 40 faces frontward or is oriented in the frontward direction 51; the rear wall 41 is spaced away from the front wall 40 in the front-rear direction; the upper wall 39 is positioned between the front wall 40 and the rear wall 41 in the front-rear direction; and the bottom wall 42 is spaced away from the upper wall 39 in the up-down direction.
- the bottom wall 42 is positioned between the front wall 40 and the rear wall 41 in the front-rear direction.
- a front surface of the front wall 40 constitutes an front surface of the ink cartridge 30; a rear surface of the rear wall 41 constitutes a rear surface of the ink cartridge 30; an upper surface of the upper wall 39 constitutes an upper surface of the ink cartridge 30; and a bottom surface of the bottom wall 42 constitutes a bottom surface of the ink cartridge 30. That is, in the upright posture (attached posture) of the ink cartridge 30, the front surface of the front wall 40 faces frontward, the rear surface of the rear wall 41 faces rearward, the bottom surface of the bottom wall 42 faces downward, and the upper surface of the upper wall 39 faces upward.
- the front surface of the front wall 40 will be referred to as the front surface 40; the rear surface of the rear wall 41 will be simply to as the rear surface 41; the upper surface of the upper wall 39 will be referred to as the upper surface 39; and the bottom surface of the bottom wall 42 will be referred to as the bottom surface 42.
- the ink cartridge 30(30M) includes a cartridge body 31 of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape.
- the cartridge body 31 in the upright posture has a generally flat shape having a height in the up-down direction (in the gravitational direction), a width in the left-right direction, and a depth in the front-rear direction, the width being smaller than the height and the depth.
- the cartridge body 31 includes the front wall 40, the rear wall 41, the upper wall 39, the bottom wall 42 and side walls 37 and 38.
- a surface of the cartridge body 31 facing frontward during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 is the front surface 40 (front surface of the front wall 40).
- a surface of the cartridge body 31 facing rearward during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 is the rear surface 41 (the rear surface of the rear wall 41).
- the side walls 37 and 38 extend to intersect with the front wall 40 and rear wall 41 so as to connect the front wall 40 and the rear wall 41. In the upright posture of the ink cartridge 30, outer surfaces of the side walls 37 and 38 faces rightward and leftward, respectively.
- the cartridge body 31 includes a lower case 31L, and an upper cover 31U fitted to the lower case 31L.
- a first ink chamber 32 and the second ink chamber 33 are formed (see Fig. 8 ).
- the lower case 31L includes the bottom wall 42, and the upper cover 31U includes the upper wall 39.
- at least a portion of the rear wall 41 constituting the lower case 31L is capable of transmitting light so that a liquid surface of the ink stored in the first ink chamber 32 and second ink chamber 33 can be viewed from outside.
- An upper surface of the upper cover 31U constitutes the upper surface 39 of the cartridge body 31.
- the rear surface 41 includes an upper portion 41U and a lower portion 41L.
- the upper portion 41U is positioned upward of the lower portion 41L.
- the lower portion 41L is positioned forward of the upper portion 41U.
- Each of the upper and lower portions 41U and 41L is a flat surface.
- the upper portion 41U and lower portion 41L cross each other but are not orthogonal to each other.
- the lower portion 41L is inclined relative to the up-down direction so as to extend closer to the front surface 40 toward the lower surface 42.
- the upper portion 41U constitutes a rearmost portion of the rear surface 41 in the rearward direction 52.
- the upper portion 41U also constitutes a rearmost portion of the ink cartridge 30.
- a rearmost point of the ink cartridge 30 is illustrated as a point P5.
- the lower surface 42 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction. Specifically, assuming the lower surface 42 has a front end 42F and a rear end 42R, the bottom surface 42 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction such that the front end 42F is positioned downward relative to the rear end 42R.
- the front end 42F of the lower surface 42 (inclined surface) is positioned frontward relative to the IC board 64, as will be described later.
- the rear end 42R of the lower surface 42 (inclined surface) is connected to a lower end of the lower portion 41L of the rear surface 41.
- the lower surface 42 is inclined relative to the horizontal direction at an angle of 2° to 4°.
- the cartridge body 31 also includes a sub-lower wall 48 and a connecting wall 49 that belong to the lower case 31L.
- the sub-lower wall 48 is positioned upward of the lower wall 42.
- the sub-lower wall 48 extends rearward from a lower end of the front wall 40.
- a front end of the sub-lower wall 48 is positioned frontward of a front end of the ink supply portion 34, and a rear end of the sub-lower wall 48 is positioned rearward of the front end of the ink supply portion 34.
- the connecting wall 49 connects the lower wall 42 (lower surface 42) and the sub-lower wall 48.
- the ink supply portion 34 extends forward from the connecting wall 49 at a position downward of the sub-lower wall 48 and upward of the lower surface 42.
- the front end of the sub-lower wall 48 may be arranged at an arbitrary position, for example, at a position rearward of the front end of the ink supply portion 34.
- the upper wall 39 belonging to the upper cover 31U has a stepped upper surface.
- the upper surface 39 (upper surface of the upper wall 39) includes a rearward portion that is raised upward relative to a frontward portion of the upper surface 39.
- the rearward portion will be referred to as a raised portion 39A, whenever necessary.
- a first protrusion 43 is provided on the upper surface 39 of the cartridge body 31. More specifically, the first protrusion 43 is disposed at the raised portion 39A of the upper surface 39. The first protrusion 43 extends in the front-rear direction and is positioned at a generally left-right center of the upper surface 39 (raised portion 39A). The first protrusion 43 has a rear end whose surface faces rearward. This surface serves as the locking surface 151.
- the locking surface 151 is a plane parallel to the gravitational direction (downward direction 53). That is, the locking surface 151 extends in the up-down direction and in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the locking surface 151 extends upward from the upper surface 39 (raised portion 39A) of the cartridge body 31. In a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, the locking surface 151 facing rearward is in contact with the lock shaft 145 from frontward thereof in an engaging region E (illustrated in Fig. 5A ). In other words, the locking surface 151 has the engaging region E configured to engage the lock shaft 145 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the engaging region E is positioned upward relative to the IC board 64 in the attached posture.
- the contact (engagement) between the locking surface 151 (engaging region E) and the lock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction enables the ink cartridge 30 to be held in the cartridge-attachment section 110 against the biasing force of a coil spring 78 of the ink supply potion 34, as will be described later.
- the locking surface 151 contacts the lock shaft 145 at the engaging region (surface contact) in the embodiment, the locking surface 151 may make contact with the lock shaft 145 at a specific point (point contact), as long as the locking surface 151 can receive the rearward urging force of the coil spring 78 to maintain the ink cartridge 30 in the attached state.
- the locking surface 151 may make contact with the lock shaft 145 on an engaging point P3 within the engaging region E (see Fig. 5A ).
- the first protrusion 43 also includes a horizontal surface 154 and an inclined surface 155.
- the horizontal surface 154 extends frontward from an upper edge 151U of the locking surface 151. That is, the horizontal surface 154 is provided frontward of the locking surface 151.
- the horizontal surface 154 is a surface extending in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction.
- the horizontal surface 154 is a surface that is positioned farthest away from the upper surface 39 among surfaces constituting the first protrusion 43.
- the horizontal surface 154 has a left-right dimension that is smaller than a front-rear dimension thereof.
- the inclined surface 155 extends frontward and downward from a front edge of the horizontal surface 154.
- the front edge of the horizontal surface 154 is the rear edge of the inclined surface 155 (denoted as a point P1 in Figs. 7 , 8 , 9A and 10 ).
- the inclined surface 155 is disposed frontward relative to the horizontal surface 154.
- the inclined surface 155 is a surface facing upward and forward.
- the inclined surface 155 is included relative to the horizontal direction at an angle of 15° to 25°.
- the locking surface 151 and the inclined surface 155 are connected to each other via the horizontal surface 154.
- a boundary edge between the locking surface 151 and inclined surface 155 does not constitute a ridge-like shape.
- the inclined surface 155 is positioned between the IC board 64 and the locking surface 151 in the front-rear direction.
- the cartridge body 31 also includes a pair of sub-upper walls 91 extending in the front-rear direction.
- One of the sub-upper walls 91 is located frontward of the upper wall 39 (to be referred to as a front sub-upper wall 91F), while the other sub-upper wall 91 is located rearward of the upper wall 39 (to be referred to as a rear sub-upper wall 91R).
- the front sub-upper wall 91F has a front end connected to an upper end of the front wall 40, and a rear end connected to a front end of the upper wall 39 via a connecting wall 95 extending in the up-down direction.
- the rear sub-upper wall 91R has a rear end connected to an upper end of the rear wall 41.
- the front and rear sub-upper walls 91F and 91R are positioned downward relative to a center portion of the upper surface 39 in the front-rear direction.
- An operation portion 90 is also provided on the upper surface 39 (raised portion 39A) of the cartridge body 31 at a position rearward of the locking surface 151.
- the operation portion 90 is disposed upward relative to the rear sub-upper wall 91R (upper surface of the rear sub-upper wall 91R) and is spaced apart therefrom in the front-rear direction.
- the operation portion 90 has a generally flat plate-like shape. Specifically, the operation portion 90 protrudes upward from the raised portion 39A of the upper surface 39, and is then bent obliquely rearward and downward. The operation portion 90 protrudes upward from the raised portion 39A of the upper surface 39 up to the same degree as the first protrusion 43 protrudes from the raised portion 39A in the up-down direction.
- the same degree means that an upper edge of the operation portion 90 is positioned higher by 0 to 1 mm, or lower by 0 to 1 mm, relative to the upper edge of the first protrusion 43 (i.e., relative to the horizontal surface 154).
- the operation portion 90 is connected to a lower edge 151L of the locking surface 151 via a surface 156 constituting part of the upper surface 39 (or, part of the raised portion 39A).
- a rib 94 is provided between the operation portion 90 and the rear sub-upper wall 91F.
- the rib 94 connects the operation portion 90 and the rear sub-upper wall 91R in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction.
- the rib 94 has a dimension in the left-right direction that is smaller than each of a dimension of the operation portion 90 and a dimension of the rear sub-upper wall 91R in the left-right direction.
- the operation portion 90 has a surface that faces diagonally upward and rearward. This surface serves as an operation surface 92.
- the operation surface 92 and the rear sub-upper wall 91R are aligned with each other at least partially in the up-down direction. In other words, when the ink cartridge 30 is viewed from above, the operation surface 92 and the rear sub-upper wall 91R overlap with each other.
- a plurality of projections e.g., a plurality of ridges 93 extending in the left-right direction is formed to be spaced apart from one another in the front-rear direction.
- These ridges 93 allow the user to easily visually recognize the operation surface 92.
- the ridges 93 can also serve to prevent the user's finger from slipping over the operation surface 92 when he or she operates the operation surface 92.
- the operation surface 92 is visible when the ink cartridge 30 is viewed from rearward and from upward.
- the user operates the operation surface 92 in order to remove the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 therefrom.
- the operation portion 90 is fixed to the cartridge body 31 so as not to move relative to the cartridge body 31.
- the operation portion 90 may be formed integrally with the cartridge body 31 so as not to pivot relative to the cartridge body 31.
- a second protrusion 83 is also provided at the upper surface 39 (raised portion 39A) of the cartridge body 31 at a position forward of the first protrusion 43.
- the second protrusion 83 is provided at the upper cover 31U.
- the second protrusion 83 extends forward from the front end of the first protrusion 43. That is, the second protrusion 83 and the first protrusion 43 are connected to each other.
- the second protrusion 83 is formed at the same left-right position as the first protrusion 43.
- the second protrusion 83 supports the IC board 64.
- the second protrusion 83 has a rear end portion whose upper surface serves as the contact surface 84.
- the contact surface 84 is connected to a lower end (front end) of the inclined surface 155 and extends frontward therefrom.
- the contact surface 84 faces upward (i.e., a flat upper surface). That is, the contact surface 84 is positioned between the IC board 64 and the locking surface 151 in the front-rear direction.
- the contact surface 84 is in contact with the positioning portion 107 of the cartridge-attachment section 110, thereby providing positioning of the ink cartridge 30 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 with respect to the up-down direction.
- the contact surface 84 is a surface that is not movable relative to the IC board 64.
- the contact surface 84 is made of the same material as a member that supports the IC board 64, i.e., the upper cover 31U.
- the inclined surface 155 may have an arbitrary configuration. For example, a continuous surface need not be formed between the contact surface 84 and the locking surface 151.
- the second protrusion 83 having the contact surface 84 and the first protrusion 43 having the locking surface 151 may not be formed to be continuous with each other. That is, the second protrusion 83 and the first protrusion 43 may be provided separately on the upper surface 39 so as to protrude upward therefrom.
- the front surface, rear surface, top surface, bottom surface, and side surfaces constituting the ink cartridge 30 need not be configured as one flat plane, respectively. That is, the front surface of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when the ink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from its front side, and that is(are) positioned frontward relative to a front-rear center of the ink cartridge 30.
- the front surface 40 i.e., the front surface of the front wall 40 connecting the sub-lower wall 48 and front sub-upper wall 91F
- a front surface of the connecting wall 49 connecting the sub-lower wall 48 and the bottom wall 42 (bottom surface 42) constitute the front surface of the ink cartridge 30.
- the connecting wall 95 connecting the front sub-upper wall 91F and the upper wall 39 also constitutes the front surface of the ink cartridges 30.
- the ink cartridge 30 may not have the sub-lower wall 48 and the front sub-upper wall 91F.
- the front surface 40 of the ink cartridge 30 may be configured as one surface continuously connecting the upper surface 39 and the lower surface 42.
- the rear surface of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when the ink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from its rear side, and that is(are) positioned rearward relative to the front-rear center of the ink cartridge 30.
- the upper surface of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when the ink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from above, and that is(are) positioned upward relative to a center of the ink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction.
- the lower surface of the ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when the ink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from below, and that is(are) positioned downward relative to the center of the ink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction. The same is applied to the side surfaces of the ink cartridge 30.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is also provided at the upper surface 39 (upper surface of the upper wall 39). Specifically, the light-blocking plate 67 protrudes upward from the upper surface 39 at a position frontward relative to the raised portion 39A.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is integrally formed with the upper cover 31U.
- the light-blocking plate 67 extends in the front-rear direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is positioned frontward relative to the second protrusion 83.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is connected to the raised portion 39A that supports the second protrusion 83 on which the IC board 64 is disposed.
- the raised portion 39A which constitutes a part of the upper surface 39, also serves as a supporting portion that supports the IC board 64.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is also positioned frontward and downward relative to the IC board 64.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is a plate made of resin containing a colored material capable of absorbing light (carbon black pigment, for example).
- the light-blocking plate 67 may be configured by attaching a material that cannot transmit light, such as aluminum, to a side surface of a plate capable of transmitting light.
- the light-blocking plate 67 has a flat plate-like shape whose left-right dimension (the width W1 illustrated in Fig. 14 ) is smaller than a front-rear dimension thereof.
- the light-blocking plate 67 has a front surface 67b, left and right side surfaces 67a, an upper surface 67c, and a sloped surface 67d.
- the front surface 67b of the light-blocking plate 67 is a surface facing frontward in the upright posture of the ink cartridge 30.
- the front surface 67b serves as an interfering surface 67b of the ink cartridge 30. That is, the interfering surface 67b faces frontward in the upright posture of the ink cartridge 30.
- the interfering surface 67b extends upward from the upper surface 39 of the cartridge body 31. Put another way, the interfering surface 67b is a plane extending upward from the upper surface 39 of the cartridge body 31.
- the interfering surface 67b is a flat plane extending in the up-down direction and in the left-right direction.
- the interfering surface 67bM of the ink cartridge 30M is configured to abut against any one of the gates 108 other than the corresponding gate 108M when the ink cartridge 30M is inserted into any one of the insertion spaces 111 different from the specified insertion space 111M. That is, the interfering surface 67bM of the ink cartridge 30M is designed to abut against the gate 108C, or the gate 108Y, or the gate 108K, in case that the ink cartridge 30M is inserted into the insertion space 111C, or the insertion space 111Y, or the insertion space 111K.
- the interfering surface 67bM of the ink cartridge 30M is designed to abut against any one of the gate 108C, the gate 108Y and the gate 108K, during insertion of the ink cartridge 30M into any one of the insertion space 111C, the insertion space 111Y, and the insertion space 111K other than the insertion space 111M, i.e., in a process of insertion of the ink cartridge 30M until the ink cartridge 30M is completely attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 to be at the attached posture.
- the both side surfaces 67a of the light-blocking plate 67 are positioned rearward of the interfering surface 67b.
- the sloped surface 67d is a sloped surface that connects a front edge of the upper surface 67c and an upper edge of the interfering surface 67b.
- the sloped surface 67d faces forward and upward.
- the rear edge of the sloped surface 67d i.e., the front edge of the upper surface 67c (denoted as a point P2 in Figs. 7 , 8 , 9A , 10 ) is the highest portion in the light-blocking plate 67.
- the upper edge of the interfering surface 67b is positioned slightly downward relative to the upper surface (horizontal surface 154 and inclined surface 155) of the first protrusion 43.
- the interfering surface 67b is positioned forward and downward of the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64.
- the both side surfaces 67a (light-blocking surfaces 67a) of the light-blocking plate 67 extend rearward from left and right ends of the interfering surface 67b (also see Fig. and 12). That is, the interfering surface 67b and each side surface 67a are aligned with each other in the front-rear direction. Further, referring to Fig. 8 , the interfering surface 67b is positioned rearward relative to an inner surface 40R (rear surface) of the front wall 40, the inner surface 40R defining a front edge of the first ink chamber 32, as will be described later.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is configured to block the light of the optical sensor 113 traveling in the left-right direction from the light-emitting portion to the light-receiving portion. More specifically, when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion of the optical sensor 113 is incident on the right or left side surface 67a of the light-blocking plate 67 before arriving at the light-receiving portion, the intensity of light received at the light-receiving portion is less than a predetermined intensity, for example, zero. Note that the light-blocking plate 67 may completely block the light traveling in the left-right direction, or may partially attenuate the light, may refract the light to change a traveling direction thereof, or may fully reflect the light.
- the light-blocking plate 67(67M) is formed with the cutout 66(66M).
- the cutout 66 is configured to allow light to pass therethrough in the left-right direction (light-transmission portion).
- the cutout 66 is a space provided by cutting out a portion of an upper end portion of the light-blocking plate 67. In other words, the cutout 66 is recessed downward from the upper surface 67c of the light-blocking plate 67.
- the cutout 66 extends in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction.
- the cutout 66 is formed at a position coincident with the corresponding optical sensor 113 in the left-right direction when the ink cartridge 30 having the light-blocking plate 67 provided with the cutout 66 is mounted in the corresponding insertion space 111.
- the cutout 66 of the light-blocking plate 67 of the attached ink cartridge 30 is located between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the corresponding optical sensor 113.
- the light from the light-emitting portion of the corresponding optical sensor 113 is not blocked by the cutout 66, and is received at the light-receiving portion.
- the light-blocking plate 67 of the present embodiment is provided with the cutout 66 as the light-transmission portion.
- the light-transmission portion of the light-blocking plate 67 may not necessarily be provided as a cutout, as long as light from the light-emitting portion of the optical sensor 113 can pass through the light-transmission portion.
- the light-transmission portion may be provided as a through-hole penetrating a portion of the light-blocking plate 67 in the left-right direction, or as a transparent plate provided in the light-blocking plate 67.
- a portion of each side surface 67a enclosed by a broken line D in Fig. 9A serves as a light -blocking portion of the light-blocking plate 67. That is, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion of the corresponding optical sensor 113 is configured to be incident on this portion D of one of the light-blocking surfaces 67a during insertion of the ink cartridge 30.
- This portion D can block or attenuate the incident light from the optical sensor 113 during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 and is therefore configured to be detected by the controller 117 through the optical sensor 113.
- This portion D may serve as a detection surface D of the light-blocking plate 67.
- This detection surface D has a rear edge Dr that also constitutes a front edge of the cutout 66 (light-transmission portion).
- the optical sensor 113 is positioned to oppose the cutout 66. This means that, in the light-blocking surface 67a, the light from the optical sensor 113 is incident on the detection surface D but cannot be incident on a portion positioned rearward of the cutout 66.
- the light-blocking plate 67 may not be formed with the cutout 66.
- the light-blocking plate 67 of the ink cartridge 30C depicted in Fig. 17 is not formed with the cutout 66.
- one of the side surfaces 67a of the light-blocking plate 67 opposes the light-emitting portion of the optical sensor 113 in the left-right direction when the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the light emitted from the light-emitting portion of the optical sensor 113 is blocked by the light-blocking plate 67 and is not received at the light-receiving portion.
- the ink cartridges 30 may or may not include the cutout 66 depending on types of the ink cartridges 30.
- the types of the ink cartridges 30 may vary depending on colors of ink, initial amounts of ink (larger or smaller), or types of ink (pigment ink or dye ink) stored in the ink cartridges 30.
- the ink cartridges 30 are, for each color, configured to store different initial amounts of ink.
- the ink cartridges 30M storing magenta ink can be classified into two types: larger-amount type and smaller-amount type.
- the ink cartridge 30M of the larger-amount type stores a larger amount of ink in the first ink chamber 32 as its initial amount of ink than the initial amount of ink stored in the first ink chamber 32 of the ink cartridge 30M of the smaller-amount type.
- the ink cartridge 30M of the larger-amount type includes the light-blocking plate 67M formed with the cutout 66M, while the ink cartridge 30M of the smaller amount type includes the light-blocking plate 67M without the cutout 66M.
- the type of the ink cartridge 30 i.e., the initial amount of ink
- the type of the ink cartridge 30 can be determined based on presence or absence of the cutout 66 in the light-blocking plate 67, as will be described later in detail.
- the IC board 64 is disposed at the upper end of the second protrusion 83 and between the light-blocking plate 67 and the first protrusion 43.
- the IC board 64 is positioned in a recess that is recessed downward and that is formed in the second protrusion 83, the recess being positioned frontward of the contact surface 84.
- the IC board 64 is supported by the second protrusion 83 from below.
- a photocurable resin is filled in the recess of the second protrusion 83, whereby the IC board 64 is adhered to the second protrusion 83.
- the IC board 64 includes a substrate, an IC (not illustrated), and four electrodes 65 mounted on an upper surface of the substrate, for example.
- the substrate is made of silicon, for example.
- the IC is a semiconductor integrated circuit and readably stores data indicating information relating to the ink cartridge 30, such as a lot number, a manufacturing date, and a color of the ink.
- the IC board 64 may be formed of a flexible board (substrate) having flexibility, provided with the IC and electrodes.
- the electrodes 65 are electrically connected to the IC.
- the four electrodes 65 each extend in the front-rear direction.
- the four electrodes 65 are arranged spaced apart from one another in the left-right direction.
- the four electrodes 65 are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate such that the electrodes 65 are exposed above to allow electrically access thereto from above.
- the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 come into contact with the corresponding contacts 106 each at a contact point P4 (illustrated in Fig. 10 ) to be electrically connected thereto during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110, and is electrically connected to the corresponding set of contacts 106 in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the IC board 64 is arranged rearward relative to the ink supply port 71 of the ink supply potion 34.
- the IC board 64 is disposed forward of the locking surface 151.
- the IC board 64 is also positioned downward of the upper edge 151U of the locking surface 151, but upward relative to the light-blocking plate 67.
- the IC board 64 is positioned rearward relative to the distal end 102E of the ink needle 102 in the frontward direction 51 in the attached posture.
- the connecting wall 95 connects the front sub-upper wall 91F and the upper wall 39. That is, the connecting wall 95 extends upward from the rear end of the front sub-upper wall 91F.
- the connecting wall 95 faces forward.
- the air communication port 96 is formed in the connecting wall 95. That is, the air communication port 96 is disposed upward relative to a center of the dimension of the cartridge body 31 in the up-down direction.
- the air communication port 96 is a through-hole formed in the connecting wall 95.
- the air communication port 96 has a substantially circular cross-section (see Fig. 6 ) and has an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of the corresponding rod 125 of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the rod 125 is configured to enter the air communication port 96 during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the first ink chamber 32, the second ink chamber 33, the ink valve chamber 35, and an air valve chamber 36 are provided inside the cartridge body 31.
- the first ink chamber 32 and the air valve chamber 36 are partitioned by a partitioning wall 44.
- the first ink chamber 32 and the second ink chamber 33 are partitioned by a partitioning wall 45.
- the partitioning wall 44 and partitioning wall 45 are both walls extending in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction.
- the partitioning wall 44 and partitioning wall 45 are disposed opposite to each other in the up-down direction.
- a through-hole 46 is formed in the partitioning wall 44.
- the first ink chamber 32 and the air valve chamber 36 communicate with each other through the through-hole 46.
- the first ink chamber 32 is a space enclosed by the following surfaces: a lower surface 44L of the partitioning wall 44, an upper surface 45U of the partitioning wall 45, and the inner surface 40R of the front wall 40, an inner surface 41F of the rear wall 41 (front surface of the rear wall 41), and inner surfaces of the side walls 37 and 38.
- the lower surface 44L and upper surface 45U defines upper and lower edges of the first ink chamber 32, respectively.
- the inner surface 40R, inner surface 41F, and the inner surfaces of the side walls 37 and 38 defines front, rear and side edges of the first ink chamber 32, respectively.
- the inner surface 40R is the rear surface of the front wall 40, i.e., a surface opposite to the front surface 40 (front surface of the front wall 40).
- the inner surface 41F is a front surface of the rear wall 41, i.e., a surface opposite to the rear surface 41 (rear surface of the rear wall 41).
- the inner surfaces of the side walls 37 and 38 are surfaces opposite to the outer surfaces of the side walls 37 and 38. In Fig. 7 , the inner surface of the side wall 38 is not illustrated.
- the second ink chamber 33 is positioned downward of the first ink chamber 32 in the upright posture of the ink cartridge 30.
- the second ink chamber 33 can store ink therein.
- the second ink chamber 33 has a capacity smaller than a capacity of the first ink chamber 32. That is, a smaller amount of ink can be stored in the second ink chamber 33 than in the first ink chamber 32.
- the second ink chamber 33 and ink valve chamber 35 are partitioned by a partitioning wall 50.
- the second ink chamber 33 communicates with the first ink chamber 32 through a communication port 47 formed in the partitioning wall 45 (see Fig. 8 ).
- the second ink chamber 33 communicates with the ink valve chamber 35 through a through-hole 99 formed in the partitioning wall 50.
- the partitioning wall 50 defines a rear edge of the ink valve chamber 35, i.e., a rear edge 75R of the ink supply potion 34 (see Fig. 8 ).
- the second ink chamber 33 is a space enclosed by the following surfaces: a lower surface 45L of the partitioning wall 45, an upper surface 42U of the lower wall 42, a rear surface 50R of the partitioning wall 50, the inner surface 41F of the rear wall 41, and the inner surfaces of the side walls 37 and 38.
- the lower surface 45L and upper surface 42U define upper and lower edges of the second ink chamber 33, respectively.
- the rear surface 50R, inner surface 41F and the inner surfaces of the side walls 37 and 38 define front, rear and side edges of the second ink chamber 33, respectively.
- a valve 97 and the coil spring 98 are disposed within the air valve chamber 36.
- the air valve chamber 36 can communicate with ambient air through the air communication port 96 formed in the connecting wall 95.
- the valve 97 is movable between a closing position sealing the air communication port 96 and an opening position separated from the air communication port 96.
- the coil spring 98 is disposed rearward of the valve 97 so as to be capable of expanding and contracting in the front-rear direction.
- the coil spring 98 urges the valve 97 in the frontward direction 51 (toward the air communication port 96). Accordingly, in a state that no external force is applied, the valve 97 is in contact with the air communication port 96 to seal the air communication port 96.
- the coil spring 98 has a spring constant that is smaller than a spring constant of the coil spring 78 of the ink supply portion 34.
- a member for sealing the air communication port 96 is not limited to the valve 97.
- a seal may be removably affixed to the connecting wall 95 to seal the air communication port 96.
- the rod 125 of the cartridge-attachment section 110 enters inside the air communication port 96, thereby moving the valve 97 rearward from the closing position toward the opening position against the biasing force of the coil spring 98.
- the valve 97 is separated from the air communication port 96 by the rod 125 and is at the separating position, the first ink chamber 32 is opened to the atmosphere.
- the ink supply portion 34 is provided at the connecting wall 49 constituting the front surface of the ink cartridge 30.
- the ink supply potion 34 has a cylindrical outer shape. More specifically, the ink supply portion 34 includes a hollow cylindrical-shaped cylinder 75, and a packing 76.
- the cylinder 75 protrudes forward from the connecting wall 49.
- the cylinder 75 has a front end that is opened to the outside of the ink cartridge 30.
- the cylinder 75 defines an inner space therein that serves as the ink valve chamber 35.
- the packing 76 is provided at the open front end of the cylinder 75.
- the packing 76 is a disk-shaped member and has a center portion formed with a through-hole.
- the packing 76 is made of an elastic material such as rubber or elastomer.
- the through-hole penetrates through the center portion of the packing 76 in the front-rear direction to provide a tubular-shaped inner peripheral surface that defines the ink supply port 71.
- the ink supply port 71 has a diameter that is slightly smaller than an outer diameter of the ink needle 102.
- a valve 77 and the coil spring 78 are disposed within the ink valve chamber 35.
- the valve 77 is movable in the front-rear direction to open and close the ink supply port 71 penetrating the center portion of the packing 76.
- the coil spring 78 biases the valve 77 forward. Accordingly, without application of an external force, the valve 77 closes the ink supply port 71 of the packing 76.
- the ink needle 102 When the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge-attachment section 110 in a state where the valve 77 closes the ink supply port 71, the ink needle 102 enters the ink supply port 71. An outer peripheral surface of the ink needle 102 entering into the ink supply port 71 is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface defining the ink supply port 71 to provide liquid-tight seal therewith, while elastically deforming the packing 76. When the distal end 102E of the ink needle 102 passes through the ink supply port 71 of the packing 76 and enters inside the ink valve chamber 35, the distal end 102E of the ink needle 102 comes in contact with the valve 77.
- the distal end 102E of the ink needle 102 moves the valve 77 rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 78, thereby separating the valve 77 from the ink supply port 71 to open the ink supply port 71. Accordingly, the ink in the valve chamber 35 is allowed to flow into the inner space of the ink needle 102.
- the ink supply portion 34 may be closed with a film.
- the ink supply port 71 may be defined by the front end of the cylinder 75, not by the packing 76.
- the ink supply port 71 may be configured to be closed by a sealing member without a through-hole.
- the ink supply port 71 may be formed by piercing the ink needle 102 into the sealing member, and be closed by an elasticity of the sealing member itself as the ink needle 102 is removed from the sealing member.
- the ink supply portion 34 need not be provided as a cylindrical-shaped member.
- a through-hole may be formed in the front wall 40 to penetrate the same in a thickness direction thereof (front-rear direction).
- the ink supply potion is partially defined by the front wall 40.
- the point P1 denotes the boundary edge at which the inclined surface 155 and the horizontal surface 154 are connected to each other; and the point P2 denotes the front edge of the upper surface 67c of the light-blocking plate 67.
- the imaginary plane X1 is inclined to extend downward toward frontward.
- the IC board 64 is disposed below the imaginary plane X1.
- the IC board 64 is disposed within this region.
- the side surfaces 67a of the light-blocking plate 67, the cutout 66, the IC board 64, the contact surface 84, and the inclined surface 155 are all disposed between the point P1 and the point P2 in the front-rear direction within the region defined between the upper surface 39 and the imaginary plane X1 in the up-down direction.
- members that can be accessed from above or the left or the right side of the ink cartridge 30 are all disposed within this region.
- the ink cartridge 30 of the present embodiment there is no member that extends to cross the imaginary plane X1 between the point P1 and the point P2. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface 155 (point P1) is the highest point, and the front edge of the upper surface 67c of the light-blocking plate 67 (point P2) is the second highest point among all the members positioned between the point P1 and point P2 on the upper surface 39 of the ink cartridge 30.
- the locking surface 151, IC board 64 and light-blocking plate 67 are arranged in this order, from the rear surface 41 toward the front surface 40.
- the light-blocking plate 67, IC board 64 and the locking surface 151 are arranged in this order toward the top. More specifically, uppermost portions of the light-blocking plate 67, the IC board 64 and the locking surface 151 are arranged toward the top in the recited order in the upward direction 54.
- the first protrusion 43 has a dimension or width in the left-right direction (width W3) that is greater than the width W1 of the light-blocking plate 67 in the left-right direction. That is, the first protrusion 43 has a wider width (W3) than the light-blocking plate 67 and protrudes from the upper surface 39 further upward relative to the light-blocking plate 67.
- the first protrusion 43 is designed to protect the light-blocking plate 67 from external damages, such as impacts that may be impinged at the time of falling of the ink cartridge 30 onto the floor, for example.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is positioned frontward relative to a center of gravity G of the ink cartridges 30 in the front-rear direction, whereas the locking surface 151 is positioned rearward relative to the center of gravity G of the ink cartridges 30 in the front-rear direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is positioned closer to the front surface 40 than the center of gravity G is to the front surface 40 in the front-rear direction.
- the locking surface 151 is positioned closer to the rear surface 41 than the center of gravity G is to the rear surface 41 in the front-rear direction.
- the IC board 64 is positioned rearward relative to the ink supply port 71 of the ink supply potion 34 in the front-rear direction. Further, the IC board 64 is positioned rearward relative to the partitioning wall 50 defining the rear edge 75R of the ink supply potion 34 in the front-rear direction.
- the contact surface 84 is also positioned rearward relative to the ink supply port 71 of the ink supply potion 34.
- the IC board 64, the contact surface 84 and the inclined surface 155 are aligned in the front-rear direction in this order from the front toward the rear. More specifically, referring to Figs.
- the upper edge of the inclined surface 155 (point PI) is the uppermost position.
- the contact surface 84 is positioned slightly higher relative to the electrodes 65 on the IC board 64, but is positioned lower than the upper edge (point PI) of the inclined surface 155.
- the contact surface 84 is positioned at the substantially same level as or slightly lower relative to the lower edge of the inclined surface 155.
- the ink supply potion 34, the IC board 64 and the locking surface 151 are aligned in the front-rear direction in this order from the front toward the rear. More specifically, referring to Figs. 8 and 10 , the IC board 64 is arranged rearward relative to the ink supply potion 34 (ink supply port 71) in the front-rear direction. Further, the IC board 64 and contact surface 84 are aligned with each other in the front-rear direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is positioned between the ink supply port 71 of the ink supply potion 34 and the IC board 64 in the front-rear direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is also positioned lower than the upper surface of the IC board 64, i.e., the electrodes 65.
- the front end 42F of the bottom surface 42 is positioned frontward relative to the IC board 64.
- Fig. 10 summarizes positional relationships among the above-mentioned elements of the ink cartridge 30.
- a distance D1 is larger than a distance D2 (D1 > D2).
- the distance D1 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the ink supply port 71 (i.e., the front end face of the ink supply potion 34 in which the ink supply port 71 is open) and the engaging point P3 on the locking surface 151.
- the distance D2 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the engaging point P3 on the locking surface 151 and the upper portion 41U of the rear surface 41 (rearmost point P5 on the rear surface 41). Further, the distance D2 is shorter than a distance D5 (D2 ⁇ D5).
- the distance D5 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the contact point P4 on the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 and the engaging point P3 on the locking surface 151.
- the distance D5 is greater than a distance D6 (D5 > D6).
- the distance D6 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the contact point P4 on the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 and the front-rear center of the contact surface 84.
- a distance D3 is longer than a distance D4 (D3 > D4).
- the distance D3 is defined as a distance in the up-down direction between the vertical center of the ink supply port 71 and the upper edge 151U of the locking surface 151.
- the distance D4 is defined as a distance in the up-down direction between the vertical center of the ink supply port 71 and the contact surface 84.
- the distance D4 is shorter than a distance D7 (D4 ⁇ D7), where the distance D7 is defined as a distance in the up-down direction between the vertical center of the ink supply port 71 and the upper end 151U of the inclined surface 155.
- the contact point P4 on the electrodes 65 is spaced away from the ink supply port 71 (front end face of the ink supply potion 34 in which the ink supply port 71 is open) by a distance D8. That is, the distance D8 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the ink supply port 71 (front end face of the ink supply potion 34 in which the ink supply port 71 is open) and the contact point P4 on the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64.
- These numerals are just examples, and should not be limited thereto.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is positioned closest to the front surface 40 (front surface of the front wall 40) that defines a frontmost edge of the ink cartridge 30. That is, the light-blocking plate 67 is the element that is positioned closest to the frontmost edge of the ink cartridge 30 among those elements that are configured to be accessed from outside (i.e., among the light-blocking plate 67, the IC board 64 and the locking surface 151).
- the distance D2 between the rearmost point P5 and the engaging point P3 in the front-rear direction is shorter than a distance D9 defined between the frontmost edge (front surface of the front wall 40) and the front edge of the light-blocking plate 67 (i.e., the interfering surface 67b) in the front-rear direction.
- the ink cartridge 30K is different from the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, and 30Y in terms of ink color and capacity of the first ink chamber 32.
- the ink cartridge 30K stores ink of a black color.
- the ink cartridge 30K is different from the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, and 30Y in that the cartridge body 31 of the ink cartridge 30K has a left-right dimension that is larger than a left-right dimension of the cartridge body 31 of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M and 30Y, as illustrated in Figs. 11A through 15 . Accordingly, the capacity of the first ink chamber 32 of the ink cartridge 30K is larger than those of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, and 30Y.
- the side surface 37 of the ink cartridge 30K (labelled as 37K in Fig. 13A ) is positioned farther away from the imaginary plane X2 than the side surface 37 of each of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M and 30Y is from the imaginary plane X2 in the rightward direction 55.
- the left-right dimension of the ink cartridge 30K is defined as a distance between outer edges of the cartridge body 31 of the ink cartridge 30K in the left-right direction (i.e., the distance between the side surface 37K and the side surface 38 of the cartridge body 31 of the ink cartridge 3 0K).
- the first protrusion 43 and second protrusion 83 for the ink cartridges 30C, 30M and 30Y are disposed on the upper surface 39 at the left-right center thereof.
- the first protrusion 43 and second protrusion 83 are arranged offset from the left-right center of the upper surface 39 of the cartridge body 31. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the first protrusion 43 and second protrusion 83 of the ink cartridge 30K are disposed on the upper surface 39 at a position offset to the left relative to the left-right center of the upper surface 39 of the cartridge body 31.
- the first protrusion 43 and second protrusion 83 for the ink cartridges 30C, 30M and 30Y are disposed on the upper surface 39 at the left-right center thereof.
- the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K are different from one another in terms of the left-right position of the light-blocking plate 67. That is, specific positions of the respective light-blocking plates 67C, 67M, 67Y and 67K in the left-right direction differ from one another among the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K, as shown in Figs. 13A to 13D .
- the left-right position of the light-blocking plate 67K does not fall within the width of the IC board 64 in left-right direction. That is, the light-blocking plate 67K of the ink cartridge 30K is not aligned with the IC board 64 (the second protrusion 83 and the first protrusion 43) in the front-rear direction.
- the width W1 of the light-blocking plate 67K is smaller than a width W2 (W1 ⁇ W2), where the width W2 is a defined as a distance (dimension) in the left-right direction between the right edge of the upper surface 39 (right side surface 37K) and the right edge of the interfering surface 67b (i.e., the right side surface 67a of the light-blocking plate 67K) in the ink cartridge 30K.
- the width W2 is a shortest distance in the left-right direction between one of the outer edges of the upper surface 39 (right edge of the upper surface 39) and one of the light-blocking surface 67a of the light-blocking plate 67K (or, one of the outer edges of the interfering surface 67b) in the ink cartridge 30K.
- the right edge of the upper surface 39 (right side surface 37K) is closer to the right side surface 67a of the light-blocking plate 67K (right edge of the interfering surface 67b) than the left edge of the upper surface 39 (left side surface 38) is to the right side surface 67a of the light-blocking plate 67K in the left-right direction.
- the imaginary plane X3 that represents an outermost edge of the cartridge body 31 of the ink cartridge 30M(30C, 30Y) in the left-right direction. That is, the imaginary plane X3 corresponds to the side surface 37 of the ink cartridge 30M (30C, 30Y) in the present embodiment.
- the light-blocking plate 67K of the ink cartridge 30K is positioned outward relative to the imaginary plane X3 in the left-right direction, i.e., opposite to the imaginary plane X2 with respect to the imaginary plane X3.
- a distance L1 is greater than a distance L2 (L1 > L2), where the distance L1 is a distance between the side surface 67a (left side surface 67aK) of the light-blocking plate 67K and the imaginary plane X2; and the distance L2 is a shortest distance between the imaginary plane X2 and the outermost edge of the cartridge body 31 of the ink cartridge 30M (30C, 30Y) in the left-right direction (i.e., the distance in the left-right direction between the imaginary plane X2 and the side surface 38 in the present embodiment).
- the interfering surface 67b(67bK) of the light-blocking plate 67K is not aligned with the IC board 64 in the front-rear direction and is offset toward the right from the imaginary plane X2.
- the interfering surface 67b(67bK) of the light-blocking plate 67K and the IC board 64 are arranged at different positions from each other in the left-right direction.
- the light-blocking plates 67C, 67M and 67Y of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y are all arranged at such left-right positions that fall within a width of the IC board 64 (a width of the second protrusion 83 and the first protrusion 43) in the left-right direction.
- the specific positions of the light-blocking plates 67C, 67M and 67Y differ from one another in the left-right direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67M of the ink cartridge 30M is positioned on the imaginary plane X2 to extend therealong.
- the interfering surface 67bM of the light-blocking plate 67M intersects with the imaginary plane X2, in the present embodiment.
- the light-blocking plate 67C of the ink cartridge 30C is positioned leftward relative to the imaginary plane X2. That is, the interfering surface 67bC of the light-blocking plate 67C is positioned offset to the left relative to the imaginary plane X2.
- the interfering surface 67bC of the ink cartridge 30C is closer to the left edge of the upper surface 39 (left side surface 38) than the interfering surface 67bM of the ink cartridge 30M is to the left edge of the upper surface 39 (left side surface 38) in the left-right direction.
- the light-blocking plate 67Y of the ink cartridge 30Y is positioned rightward relative to the imaginary plane X2. That is, the interfering surface 67bY of the light-blocking plate 67Y is positioned offset to the right relative to the imaginary plane X2.
- the interfering surfaces 67bC, 67bY of the light-blocking plate 67C, 67Y are positioned away from the imaginary plane X2 in the left-right direction and offset from the center of the IC board 64 in the left-right direction.
- the valve 77 closes the ink supply port 71 of the packing 76. Accordingly, at this time, ink flow to the outside of the ink cartridge 30 is interrupted. Further, in this state, the valve 97 closes the air communication port 96. Accordingly, the first ink chamber 32 is not opened to the atmosphere. Further, before attachment of the ink cartridge 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110, the opening 112 of the case 101 is closed by the cover 114 at the closing position.
- the user pivots the cover 114 from the closing position to the opening position.
- the ink cartridge 30 is configured to be inserted into the case 101 through the opening 112 of the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the upright posture: that is, in such a posture that the front surface 40 of the cartridge body 31 faces frontward, and the upper surface 39 of the cartridge body 31 face upward. Since the upper portion 41U of the rear surface 41 of the cartridge body 31 is positioned rearward relative to the lower portion 41L, that is, since the upper portion 41U is positioned closer to the user than the lower portion 41L is to the user, the user pushes the upper portion 41U forward to insert the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110. The bottom portion of the ink cartridge 30 thus enters the corresponding guide groove 109 provided in the bottom surface of the case 101.
- the ink supply portion 34 enters the corresponding guide portion 105.
- the rod 125 enters into the corresponding air communication port 96.
- the interfering surface 67b of the light-blocking plate 67 arrives at the corresponding gate 108 of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the left-right position of the interfering surface 67bM of the light-blocking plate 67M is coincident with the left-right position of the slit 119M of the gate 108M.
- the interfering surface 67bM passes through the slit 119M without abutting against the opposing walls 118 of the gate 108M, and moves past the gate 108M to be positioned frontward of the gate 108M, as depicted in Fig. 16 .
- the locking surface 151 is positioned still rearward of the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 30C is inserted into the insertion space 111M that does not correspond to the ink cartridge 30C.
- the interfering surface 67bC since the left-right position of the interfering surface 67bC does not coincide with the left-right position of the slit 119M, the interfering surface 67bC abuts against the opposing walls 118 of the gate 108M as the cartridge body 31 of the ink cartridge 30C is moved in the forward direction 51 along the guide groove 109, as illustrated in Fig. 18 .
- the interfering surface 67bC of the ink cartridge 30C therefore cannot pass through the slit 119M.
- the ink cartridge 30C cannot be inserted further forward in the frontward direction 51 from the state depicted in Fig. 18 . Accordingly, the ink needle 102 does not separate the valve 77 of the ink cartridge 30C from the packing 76. That is, the ink supply port 71 is not yet opened by the ink needle 102 and thus the ink supply potion 34 is not connected to the ink needle 102. Still alternatively, the ink needle 102 may be separated from the ink supply port 71 of the ink supply potion 34 in the front-rear direction when the interfering surface 67bC abuts against the opposing walls 118 of the gate 108M.
- the ink supply potion 34 is connected to the ink needle 102" denotes a state where the ink needle 102 separates the valve 77 from the ink supply port 71 and the ink supply port 71 is opened.
- the ink supply potion 34 is not connected to the ink needle 102, since the ink needle 102 is in contact with the packing 76 but the valve 77 still closes the ink supply port 71.
- the light-blocking plate 67 of the ink cartridge 30 can function as a physical key to see whether or not the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into a correct one of the insertion spaces 111 (designated insertion space 111) of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the ink needle 102 passes through the ink supply port 71 to separate the valve 77 from the packing 76 against the biasing force of the coil spring 78.
- the vertical position of the ink supply portion 34 is fixed relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the ink cartridge 30M as a whole is applied with the biasing force of the coil spring 78 of the ink supply potion 34 so that the ink cartridge 30M is urged rearward.
- the rod 125 having entered into the air communication port 96 abuts against the valve 97 to separate the valve 97 from the air communication port 96 against the biasing force of the coil spring 98.
- the first ink chamber 32 is opened to the atmosphere through the through-hole 46, the air valve chamber 36, and the air communication port 96.
- the first protrusion 43 reaches the lock shaft 145, and the inclined surface 155 is brought into contact with the lock shaft 145 and slidingly moves in the frontward direction 51 relative to the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 30M is applied with biasing forces generated by the compressed coil springs 78 and 98 acting in the rearward direction 52.
- the magnitude of the biasing force generated by each of the coil springs 78 and 98 is determined by a spring constant thereof and a distance thereof compressed from its natural length.
- the spring constant of the coil spring 98 is smaller than the spring constant of the coil spring 78.
- the compressed distance of the coil spring 78 (a distance by which the valve 77 is separated from the ink supply port 71) is larger than the compressed distance of the coil spring 98 (a distance by which the valve 79 is separated from the air communication port 96).
- the magnitude of the biasing force generated by the coil spring 78 is larger than the magnitude of the biasing force of the biasing force generated by the coil spring 98.
- the ink cartridge 30M is also applied with a rotational moment acting in a counterclockwise direction in Fig. 16 , since the user pushes the upper portion 41U of the rear surface 41.
- the contact between the inclined surface 155 and the lock shaft 145 causes the ink cartridge 30M to pivot in a clockwise direction in Fig. 17 about a center C of the ink supply port 71 of the packing 76 into which the ink needle 102 is inserted. That is, the center C of the ink supply port 71 serves as a pivot center of the ink cartridge 30 in the present embodiment.
- the position of the pivot center of the ink cartridge 30 may vary depending on the shape of the ink needle 102 and the shape of the ink supply port 71.
- the pivot center is a center of a portion PP at which the ink needle 102 and the inner peripheral surface of the tubular ink supply port 71 are in contact with each other.
- the pivot center is the center of the portion PP at which the ink needle 102 contact the inner peripheral surface of the packing 76 defining the ink supply port 71.
- This portion PP at which the ink needle 102 and the ink supply port 71 (the inner peripheral surface of the packing 76) contact each other will be referred to as a particular portion PP hereinafter, whenever necessary.
- the ink cartridge 30 is thus inserted in the frontward direction 51 in a posture illustrated in Figs. 16 and 17 .
- the posture illustrated in Figs. 16 and 17 is referred to as a second posture, hereinafter.
- the inner diameter of the air communication port 96 is larger than the outer diameter of the rod 125, a space is also provided between the rod 125 and the air communication port 96. This space also allows the pivotal movement of the ink cartridge 30 in the clockwise direction. In other words, in the state where the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, the rod 125 and the air communication port 96 do not contact with each other. That is, vertical positioning is not performed between the rod 125 and the air communication port 96.
- a space is also provided between the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 and the corresponding set of contacts 106 in the up-down direction. That is, the electrodes 65 and the contacts 106 are separated from each other in the up-down direction.
- the contact surface 84 is located below the corresponding positioning portion 107. A space is therefore formed between the positioning portion 107 and the contact surface 84 in the up-down direction. That is, the positioning portion 107 and the abutment part 84 are separated from each other in the up-down direction.
- the inclined surface 155 and the horizontal surface 154 of the first protrusion 43 move frontward beyond the lock shaft 145, reaching a position closer to the end wall of the case 101 than the lock shaft 145 is to the end wall, as illustrated in Fig. 17 .
- the locking surface 151 is positioned lower relative to the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 30M(30) is applied with the rotational moment acting in the counterclockwise direction in Fig. 17 due to the user's forward pushing on the upper portion 41U of the rear surface 41. Also, the rotational moment acting in the clockwise direction in Fig. 17 is also generated in the ink cartridge 30M(30) by the biasing force of the coil spring 98 disposed in the air valve chamber 36. In a state where the inclined surface 155 and the horizontal surface 154 no longer abut against the lock shaft 145, the ink cartridge 30M(30) is caused to pivot in the counterclockwise direction in Fig. 17 about the pivot center C due to the user's pushing force against the biasing force of the coil spring 98. The contact surface 84 is thereby brought into contact with the positioning portion 107 from below.
- the locking surface 151 faces rearward and opposes the lock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction.
- the ink cartridge 30M(30) is moved rearward by the biasing force of the coil spring 78.
- the locking surface 151 therefore moves rearward to abut against the lock shaft 145 from frontward thereof.
- This contact between the locking surface 151 and the lock shaft 145 restricts the ink cartridge 30 from moving further rearward in the rearward direction 52. That is, positioning of the ink cartridge 30M(30) in the front-rear direction relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 is provided by the contact between the locking surface 151 and the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridges 30M(30) is also restricted from moving upward. That is, the ink cartridge 30M(30) is prevented from pivoting further in the counterclockwise direction about the center C. This abutment between the contact surface 84 and the positioning portion 107 thus provides positioning of the ink cartridge 30M(30) in the up-down direction. As a result, the ink cartridge 30M(30) is fixed in position in the corresponding insertion space 111M(111) of the cartridge-attachment section 110, as illustrated in Fig. 4 .
- the attached posture will also be referred to as a first posture, hereinafter, whenever necessary, for the sake of explanation.
- first posture hereinafter
- the "insertion of the ink cartridge 30" is deemed to be completed when the ink cartridge 30 is fixed in position relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110, with the locking surface 151 engaged with the lock shaft 145. That is, the "insertion of the ink cartridge 30" is not deemed to end simply because the ink needle 102 is inserted into the ink supply potion 34.
- the ink cartridge 30 is applied with a force acting downward (i.e., in a direction moving from the first posture to the second posture) about the center C, due to: a self-weight of the ink cartridge 30; a biasing force that the IC board 64 receives from the contacts 106; and the rotational moment acting in the clockwise direction and generated by the coil spring 98 provided in the air valve chamber 36.
- the ink cartridge 30 is also applied with a force acting upward (i.e., in a direction moving from the second posture to the first posture) about the center C due to the rotational moment acting in the counterclockwise direction, the rotational moment being generated by the coil spring 78 in the ink valve chamber 35 acting on the locking surface 151. Since the contact surface 84 is in abutment with the positioning portion 107, the contact surface 84 is in receipt of a component of the upward force acting on the ink cartridge 30, thereby providing the positioning of the ink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction.
- the lock shaft 145 is separated in the up-down direction from the surface 156 extending rearward from the lower edge 151L of the locking surface 151. That is, the lock shaft 145 does not contribute to any positioning of the ink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction.
- the up-down positioning of the ink cartridge 30 is performed, not by the lock shaft 145 provided separately from the case 101, but by the positioning portion 107 that is integrally formed with the case 101 and that is disposed closer to the set of contacts 106 than the lock shaft 145 is to the contacts 106.
- Fig. 4 assume an imaginary arc Q of a circle that is centered on the center C and that passes a center Z of the lock shaft 145 (see Fig. 5A ).
- the upper edge 151U of the locking surface 151 is positioned outside the imaginary arc Q, while the lower edge 151L of the locking surface 151 is positioned inside the imaginary arc Q.
- the ink cartridge 30M(30) in the first posture is fixed in position by the contact between the ink supply port 71 and the ink needle 102 and by the contact between the locking surface 151 and the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 30M(30) in the first posture is applied with the biasing force of the coil spring 78 acting in the rearward direction 52.
- a moment acting forward and upward is generated in the ink cartridge 30M(30). This moment corresponds to a magnitude of a force urging the ink cartridge 30M(30) to pivot in the counterclockwise direction about the center C.
- the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 electrically contact the corresponding contacts 106 while elastically deforming the contacts 106 upward.
- the IC board 64 is kept elastically deforming the contacts 106.
- the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 which are positioned rearward of the center C and forward of the locking surface 151, are respectively brought into contact with the contacts 106 from below to be electrically connected thereto. That is, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the ink cartridge 30 moves during insertion and removal thereof (i.e., the front-rear direction) intersects with the direction in which the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 and the contacts 106 contact and separate from each other (i.e., the up-down direction). Accordingly, the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 are prevented from being moved in the front-rear direction relative to the contacts 106 while being in contact with the contacts 106, thereby suppressing generation of foreign matters such as shavings of the electrodes 65.
- the user pivots the cover 114 from the opening position to the closing position.
- the cover sensor 115 outputs a detection signal indicative of detection of the cover 114.
- the controller 117 determines whether or not the cutout 66 is provided in the light-blocking plate 67 of the attached ink cartridge 30, depending on signals outputted from the optical sensor 113.
- the controller 117 determines the type of the attached ink cartridge 30, such as an initial capacity of the ink cartridge 30 and a composition of the ink stored in the ink cartridge 30, based on the presence/absence of the cutout 66.
- the relationship between the presence/absence of the cutout 66 and the type of the ink cartridge 30 is prestored in the memory of the controller 117 as predetermined data.
- the user For removing the ink cartridge 30 from the cartridge-attachment section 110, the user first pivots the cover 114 from the closing position to the opening position and presses the operation surface 92 of the ink cartridge 30 downward.
- the operation surface 92 faces upward and rearward.
- the locking surface 151 is separated from the lock shaft 145 by the force acting forward, and the ink cartridge 30 is pivoted in the clockwise direction in Fig. 4 by the downward force.
- the contact surface 84 is separated from the positioning portion 107, and the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 are separated from the respective contacts 106.
- the locking surface 151 is also positioned downward of the lock shaft 145. That is, the ink cartridge 30 is moved from the first posture to the second posture.
- the ink cartridge 30 is moved rearward relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 due to the biasing force of the coil spring 78. The user can therefore hold the cartridge body 31 to remove the ink cartridge 30 out of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the light-blocking plate 67 passes through the slit 119 of the corresponding gate 108, and moves rearward past the gate 108.
- the controller 117 determines the type of the ink cartridges 30 mounted in the insertion space 111 based on output signals from the optical sensor 113. As described above, the output signals from the optical sensor 113 vary depending on whether or not the cutout 66 is formed in the light-blocking plate 67 in the mounted ink cartridge 30.
- the controller 117 first determines in S11 whether or not the cover 114 is at the opening position.
- the controller 117 repeats the step S11 (S11: NO) unless the controller 117 receives a high level signal from the cover sensor 115.
- the controller 117 determines that the cover 114 is at the opening position (S11: Yes) upon receipt of the high level signal from the cover sensor 115.
- the controller 117 determines in S12 whether or not the high level signal from the optical sensor 113 is changed to a low level signal.
- the signal outputted from the optical sensor 113 becomes low level at least once when the detection surface D of the light-blocking plate 67 of the ink cartridge 30 comes between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the optical sensor 113 during insertion of the ink cartridges 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the change in signal from high level to low level at the optical sensor 113 means that the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the designated insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the optical sensor 113 of the insertion space 111C does not output the low level signal since the optical sensor 113 of the insertion space 111C cannot detect the detection surface D of the light-blocking plate 67M of the ink cartridge 30M that cannot passes through the slit 109C of the gate 108C, as illustrated in Fig. 18 .
- the controller 117 sets a flag stored in the memory ON in S13. That is, the ON flag means that the ink cartridge 30 having the light-blocking plate 67 (detection surface D) has been inserted into the designated insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the controller 117 then advances to the step S14.
- the optical sensor 113 continues to issue the high level signal unless the detection surface D of the light-blocking plate 67 passes the optical sensor 113, that is, in case that the ink cartridge 30 is not inserted into the designated insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. Note that, here, even if the ink cartridge 30 without the light-blocking plate 67 (detection surface D) is inserted into the designated insertion space 111, the optical sensor 113 continues to output the high level signal (S12: NO) since the light from the optical sensor 113 is not interrupted. The controller 117 therefore advances to the step S14.
- the controller 117 determines in S14 whether or not the cover 114 is closed. Specifically, when the signal outputted from the cover sensor 115 changes to low level, the controller 117 determines that the cover 114 is at the closing position (S14: YES) and advances to the step S15. The controller 117 goes back to the step S12 as long as the signal from the cover sensor 115 remains at high level and does not change to low level (S14: NO).
- the controller 117 determines in S15 whether or not accessing to the IC board 64 through the contacts 106 can be made. In case that the controller 117 cannot access the IC board 64 (S15: NO), the controller 117 determines in S21 that the ink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. In this case, the controller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him that the ink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, for example, through a message such as "No Cartridge" on a display.
- the controller 117 determines in S16 whether or not the flag stored in the memory is ON.
- the controller 117 determines in S20 that the ink cartridge 30 without the light-blocking plate 67 is attached.
- the controller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him that the inserted ink cartridge is abnormal, for example, through a message such as "Unable to Detect Cartridge" on the display.
- the ink cartridge 30 may lose the light-blocking plate 67, for example, due to some kind of damages impinged on the light-blocking plate 67.
- the controller 117 determines in S17 whether the signal outputted from the optical sensor 113 is high level or low level. In case that the signal from the optical sensor 113 is a high level signal (S17: High), the controller 117 determines in S18 that the attached ink cartridge 30 belongs to a type A. That is, the ink cartridge 30 having the light-blocking plate 67 formed with the cutout 66 as shown in Figs. 6 to 8 , for example, belongs to the type A.
- the optical sensor 113 is configured to output the high level signal in case that the cutout 66 is formed in the light-blocking plate 67 of the attached ink cartridge 30.
- the cartridge 30 of the type A may be a high-capacity cartridge whose initial capacity of ink is large, for example.
- the controller 117 may set an initial number of sheets that the printer 10 can print with the initial amount of ink stored in the ink cartridge 30 of the type A.
- the controller 117 may set a threshold value corresponding to the initial amount of ink stored in the ink cartridge 30 of the type A. The controller 117 may halt printing operations if the printer 10 has used an amount of ink larger than the threshold value, or may give a warning to the user to inform him that little ink is left in the attached ink cartridge 30.
- the controller 117 determines in S19 that the attached ink cartridge 30 belongs to a type B. That is, the ink cartridge 30 having the light-blocking plate 67 without the cutout 66 as shown in Fig. 18 , for example, belongs to the type B.
- the optical sensor 113 is configured to output the low level signal in case that the cutout 66 is not formed in the light-blocking plate 67 of the attached ink cartridge 30.
- the cartridge 30 of the type B may be a low-capacity cartridge whose initial capacity of ink is not large, or smaller than the initial capacity of ink of the ink cartridge 30 of the type A.
- the controller 117 may set an initial number of sheets that the printer 10 can print with the initial amount of ink stored in the ink cartridge 30 of the type B.
- the controller 117 may set a threshold value corresponding to the initial amount of ink stored in the ink cartridge 30 of the type B. The controller 117 may halt printing operations if the printer 10 has used an amount of ink larger than the threshold value, or may give a warning to the user to inform him that little ink is left in the attached ink cartridge 30.
- the interfering surface 67b is disposed frontward and downward relative to the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64.
- the IC board 64 is positioned upward relative to the first ink chamber 32 and the second ink chamber 33.
- this structure of the interfering surface 67b can prevent the ink cartridge 30 inserted into the incorrect insertion space 111 from becoming attached in the incorrect insertion space 111. That is, due to the interference between the interfering surface 67b of the incorrectly inserted ink cartridge 30 and the opposing walls 118 of the incorrect gate 108, the ink supply potion 34 of the incorrectly inserted ink cartridge 30 can be prevented from being connected to the ink needle 102; and the incorrectly inserted ink cartridge 30 is prevented from being locked by the lock shaft 145 in the incorrect insertion space 111.
- the ink cartridge 30 of the present embodiment includes the light-blocking plate 67.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is positioned rearward relative to the interfering surface 67b in the attached posture.
- the light-blocking plate 67 has a light-blocking surface 67a (detection surface D) extending in the frontward direction 51 and downward direction 53.
- the light-blocking plate 67 of the ink cartridge 30 is configured to block or attenuate the light traveling in the left-right direction during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 as well as at the time of completion of attachment to the cartridge-attachment section 110. That is, the light-blocking plate 67 of the embodiment is configured to be detected by the corresponding optical sensor 113 not only during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 but also in a state where the ink cartridge 30 is in the attached posture.
- the light-blocking plate 67 may or may not have the cutout 66 formed therein, depending on the type of the ink cartridge 30, for example, depending on the initial capacity of ink stored in the ink cartridge 30 in the present embodiment.
- the type of the ink cartridge 30 can be determined by detecting the presence or absence of the cutout 66 of the light-blocking plate 67, using the optical sensor 113.
- the interfering surface 67b of the ink cartridge 30 is configured to abut against the gate 108 provided at the insertion space 111 other than the designated insertion space 111 before the valve 77 is opened by the ink needle 102 and the ink supply potion 34 is connected to the ink needle 102.
- the ink stored in the ink cartridge 30 is prevented from being supplied to the sub tank 28 of a different color.
- interfering surface 67b is aligned with the light-blocking plate 67 (side surfaces 67a) in the front-rear direction. This arrangement of the interfering surface 67b and the side surfaces 67a of the light-blocking plate 67 can realize downsizing of the light-blocking plate 67 in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction.
- the width W1 of the interfering surface 67b in the left-right direction is smaller than the width W2 (shortest distance in the left-right direction between one of the outer edges of the upper surface 39 and one of the side surfaces 67a of the light-blocking plate 67K).
- the width W2 is greater than the width W1
- those components configured to make access to the ink cartridge 30, such as the contacts 106 and optical sensor 113, can be arranged.
- the interfering surface 67b is constituted as the front surface of the light-blocking plate 67, the structure of the interfering surface 67b can be simplified.
- the sloped surface 67d is provided to connect the interfering surface 67b and the upper surface 67c of the light-blocking plate 67. This structure can reduce a possibility that the interfering surface 67b and the light-blocking plate 67 may be damaged when the ink cartridge 30 is dropped on the floor with the upper cover 31U facing downward.
- the interfering surface 67bK and the IC board 64 do not overlap each other in the left-right direction, i.e., arranged at different positions from each other in the left-right direction.
- the gate 108 corresponding to the interfering surface 67b is further less likely to make contact with the IC board 64 during the insertion of the ink cartridge 30K into the insertion space 111K of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the IC board 64 is disposed frontward of the locking surface 151 and downward of the upper edge 151U of the locking surface 151.
- the lock shaft 145 is suppressed from making contact with the IC board 64 and the interfering surface 67b during the insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the corresponding insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the IC board 64 and the interfering surface 67b are provided on the upper cover 31U. Accordingly, the lower case 31L can be made common to the ink cartridges 30C, 30M and 30Y, irrespective of the types of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M and 30Y.
- the gate 108K (slit 119K) corresponding to the interfering surface 67bK of the ink cartridge 30K is positioned outward relative to a position corresponding to the outermost edge (right side surface 37) of the cartridge body 31 of any one of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, and 30Y in the left-right direction.
- This structure can prevent wrong insertion of the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, and 30Y into the insertion space 111K.
- a relative position between the gate 108C and the contacts 106 in the left-right direction in the insertion space 111C is different from a relative position between the gate 108M and the corresponding contacts 106 in the left-right direction in the corresponding insertion space 111M.
- the relative position between the gate 108C and the contacts 106 in the left-right direction in the insertion space 111C is also different from a relative position between the gate 108Y and the corresponding contacts 106 in the left-right direction in the corresponding insertion space 111Y.
- This structure can prevent the ink cartridges 30C, 30M, and 30Y from being inserted into incorrect one of the insertion spaces 111 other than the prescribed insertion space 111.
- the ink cartridge 30C is prevented from being inserted into the insertion space 111M or into the insertion space 111Y.
- the ink cartridge 30M is prevented from being inserted into the insertion space 111C or into the insertion space 111Y.
- the ink cartridge 30Y is also prevented from being inserted into the insertion space 111C or into the insertion space 111M.
- an ink cartridge 230 may include a protrusion 285 having an interfering surface 285b, and a light-blocking plate 267 having a light-blocking surface 267a as the detection surface D. That is, the protrusion 285 (interfering surface 285b) and light-blocking plate 267 (light-blocking surface 267a) are provided independently of each other.
- the interfering surface 285b is arranged to be aligned with the light-blocking plate 267 in the front-rear direction.
- the protrusion 285 is positioned frontward of the light-blocking plate 267 in the front-rear direction.
- the light-blocking plate 267 is configured to block the light from the corresponding optical sensor 113 during insertion of the ink cartridge 230 and in the attached posture of the ink cartridge 230.
- the light-blocking plate 267 shown in Fig. 20 is not formed with a cutout.
- the protrusion 285 may be configured not to block light. That is, in case that the protrusion 285 and the light-blocking plate 267 are provided as separate members from each other, the protrusion 285 may or may not be made of a material capable of transmitting light therethrough (translucent resin, for example).
- the protrusion 285 does not disturb detection of the light-blocking plate 267 by the corresponding optical sensor 113 during insertion of the ink cartridge 230 into the corresponding insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- FIGs. 21 and 22 depict an ink cartridge 330 according to a second modification to the embodiment.
- the ink cartridge 330 includes a cartridge body 331 configured of an upper cover 331U and a lower case 331L.
- the cartridge body 331 includes a front surface 340, a rear surface 341, an upper surface 339, a bottom surface 342, side surfaces 337 and 338, a sub-lower wall 348, and a connecting wall 349 corresponding to the front surface 40, the rear surface 41, the upper surface 39, the bottom surface 42, the side surfaces 37 and 38, the sub-lower wall 48, and the connecting wall 49 of the ink cartridge 30 of the embodiment, respectively.
- the side wall 337 is not shown.
- the ink supply potion 34 is provided at the connecting wall 349, as in the embodiment.
- the ink cartridge 330 has the same configuration on the upper surface 339 as that on the upper surface 39 of the ink cartridge 30 of the embodiment.
- the ink cartridge 330 shown in Fig. 21 includes the light-blocking plate 67 without the cutout 66. That is, a portion of the light-blocking plate 67 corresponding to the cutout 66 (a portion indicated by a circle in a broken line in Fig. 21 ) now serves as the detection surface D. That is, the light from the optical sensor 113 is configured be incident on the circled portion on the detection surface D.
- the coil spring 98 is disposed in the air valve chamber 36 to move the valve 97 to open and close the air communication port 96. Accordingly, while the ink cartridge 30 is inserted into and attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, the ink cartridge 30 receives the urging force acting in the clockwise direction (by the coil spring 98) as well as the urging force acting in the counterclockwise direction (by the coil spring 78 of the ink supply potion 34).
- the ink cartridge 330 does not include the valve 97 and the coil spring 98. That is, the ink cartridge 330 is configured to receive the urging force of the coil spring 78 of the ink supply potion 34 as an urging force acting in the rearward direction 52 during insertion and attachment of the ink cartridge 330 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the ink cartridge 330 is applied with the upward rotational moment about the center C (portion PP) by the urging force of the coil spring 78 acting in the counterclockwise direction, in addition to the user's forward pushing of an upper portion of the rear surface 341.
- the ink cartridge 330 is therefore pivoted counterclockwise from the second posture to the first posture.
- the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 are brought into contact with the contacts 106 from below to be electrically connected thereto; and the contact surface 84 is brought into contact with the positioning portion 107 from below.
- the ink cartridge 330 As the user releases his fingers from the ink cartridge 330, the ink cartridge 330 is moved in the rearward direction 52 due to the urging force of the coil spring 78, causing the locking surface 151 to abut against the lock shaft 145 from its front side. The ink cartridge 330 is thus fixed in position in the front-rear direction. That is, the locking surface 151 receives the rearward moment applied from the coil spring 78, thereby maintaining the ink cartridge 330 in the attached state (in the first posture or upright posture).
- the light-blocking plate 67 and the IC board 64 are arranged on the upper surface 39 constituting the cartridge body 31 such that the interfering surface 67b of the light-blocking plate 67 is disposed frontward and downward relative to the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64.
- the gate 108 corresponding to the interfering surface 67b is less likely to contact the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 during the insertion of the ink cartridge 330 into the corresponding insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- positioning of the ink cartridge 330 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 is provided: by the abutment of the locking surface 151 against the lock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction; and by the contact of the contact surface 84 with the positioning portion 107 in the up-down direction.
- the rearward urging force of the coil spring 78 is stably received by the locking surface 151 that is in contact with the lock shaft 145, thereby preventing the ink cartridge 330 from moving further in the rearward direction 52 and providing positioning of the ink cartridge 330 in the front-rear direction relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110. Accordingly, the contact pressure between the electrodes 65 of the IC board 64 and the contacts 106 can be stably maintained.
- the cartridge body 31 is configured of two different members, i.e., the upper cover 31U and the lower case 31L attached to each other.
- the cartridge body 31 may be formed as a single member, without including an upper cover and a lower case.
- Figs. 23A and 23B illustrate an ink cartridge 43 according to a third modification to the embodiment.
- the ink cartridge 430 includes a cartridge body 431 of a rectangular parallelepiped shape.
- the cartridge body 431 includes a front wall 440, a rear wall 441, an upper wall 439, a bottom wall 442 and side walls 437 and 438.
- Each of these walls 440, 441, 439, 442, 437 and 438 constitute an outer shell of the ink cartridge 430.
- the cartridge body 431 is not configured of a cover and a case.
- an upper surface of the upper wall 439 constitutes an upper surface of the cartridge body 431.
- a front surface of the front wall 440 constitutes a front surface of the cartridge body 431.
- the front surface of the front wall 440 (front surface of the cartridge body 431) is a flat surface, unlike the front surface (40, 49, 95) of the ink cartridge 30 of the embodiment.
- a rear surface of the rear wall 441 constitutes a rear surface of the cartridge body 431.
- the rear surface of the rear wall 441 (rear surface of the cartridge body 431) is a flat surface, although the rear surface 41 of the ink cartridge 30 of the embodiment is configured of two portions (upper portion 41U and lower portion 41L).
- An ink chamber 432 is defined inside the cartridge body 431. More specifically, the ink chamber 432 is defined by inner surfaces of the front wall 440, the rear wall 441, the upper wall 439, the bottom wall 442 and the side walls 437 and 438.
- An upper end region in the ink chamber 432 (a region above an ink surface of ink stored in the ink chamber 432) is in communication with ambient air through an air communication port 496 formed in the upper wall 439.
- the air communication port 496 may not necessarily be formed in the upper wall 439, but may be formed in one of other walls constituting the cartridge body 431.
- the air communication port 496 may be formed in one of the side walls 437 and 438.
- An ink supply portion 434 is provided at the front wall 440.
- the ink supply potion 434 is a through-hole formed in a lower end portion of the front wall 440 to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction.
- the ink supply potion 434 defines an ink supply port 471 that is open frontward on the front surface of the front wall 440.
- a light-blocking plate 467, an IC board 464, a contact surface 484 and a first protrusion 443 having a locking surface 451 are arranged in the front-rear direction, as in the depicted embodiment. Specifically, the light-blocking plate 467, the IC board 464, the contact surface 484, and the locking surface 451 are aligned with one another in the front-rear direction in this order from the front toward the rear.
- the light-blocking plate 467 is positioned frontward and downward relative to the IC board 64.
- the front surface of the light-blocking plate 467 serves as an interfering surface 467b.
- the light-blocking plate 467 has side surfaces including the detection surface D.
- the light-blocking plate 467 shown in Figs. 23A and 23B is not formed with a cutout (i.e., the ink cartridge 430 shown in Figs. 23A and 23B belongs to the type B).
- the contact surface 484 is arranged between the IC board 464 and the locking surface 451 in the front-rear direction.
- the contact surface 484 is positioned upward relative to the IC board 464 but downward relative to an upper edge (denoted as the point PI) of the locking surface 451.
- the upper edge (the point PI) of the locking surface 451 is the highest (farthest away from the upper surface 439) among all parts disposed at the upper surface 439 between the light-blocking plate 467 and the locking surface 451 in the front-rear direction.
- the upper edge (the point P1) of the locking surface 451 constitutes an uppermost edge of the ink cartridge 430 between the light-blocking plate 467 and the locking surface 451.
- the locking surface 451 is positioned closer to the rear wall 441 than to the IC board 464 in the front-rear direction.
- the positioning portion 107 of the printer 10, which is configured to contact the contact surface 484, is less likely to interfere with the light-blocking plate 467 (i.e., the interfering surface 467b and the detection surface D) during insertion of the ink cartridge 430 into the cartridge-attachment section 110, Further, the lock shaft 145 of the cartridge-attachment section 110, which is configured to engage the locking surface 451, is less likely to interfere with the contact surface 484, the detection surface D (interfering surface 467b), and the IC board 64 during the insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is disposed on the upper surface 39 (a portion of the upper surface 39 other than the raised portion 39A). However, the light-blocking plate 67 may be provided to extend frontward from the raised portion 39A. That is, the light-blocking plate 67 may be connected to at least one of the raised portion and the portion other than the raised portion 39A on the upper surface 39.
- FIG. 24 shows still another example of the light-blocking plate 67.
- An ink cartridge 530 according to a fourth modification includes a cartridge body 531 including a flat front wall 540, a flat rear wall 541, a flat upper surface 539 and a flat bottom wall 542.
- the ink supply potion 34 is provided at the front wall 540.
- On the upper surface 539 the first protrusion 443 and a second protrusion 583 supporting the IC board 64 is disposed.
- the first protrusion 443 and the second protrusion 583 are aligned with one another in the front-rear direction, as in the embodiment.
- a light-blocking plate 567 is connected to a front surface of the second protrusion 583 and extends frontward therefrom. That is, the light-blocking plate 567 is not directly connected to the upper surface 539, and an interfering surface 567b of the light-blocking plate 567 is connected to the front surface of the second protrusion 583.
- the ink cartridge 30M in case that the ink cartridge 30M is erroneously inserted into the insertion space 111C, due to the interference between the interfering surface 67bM of the ink cartridge 30M and the gate 108C disposed in the insertion space 111C, the ink cartridge 30M cannot move further forward from the state illustrated in Fig. 18 .
- the valve 77 is not yet opened by the ink needle 102, and therefore the ink in the ink cartridge 30M (ink of magenta color) is not allowed to flow into the tank 103 (or the sub tank 28) corresponding to the yellow color in the cartridge-attachment section 110. That is, in the embodiment, the interfering surface 67b(67bM) is configured to abut against the incorrect gate 108(108C) before the ink supply potion 34 is connected to the ink needle 102.
- the ink supply potion 34 may be connected to the ink needle 102 before the interfering surface 67bM abuts against the gate 108C as a result of wrong insertion of the ink cartridge 30M into the insertion space 111C.
- the valve 77 is opened by the ink needle 102 and the ink supply potion 34 is connected to the ink needle 102 in a state where the interfering surface 67bM of an ink cartridge 630M is in abutment with the gate 108C disposed in the insertion space 111C.
- the ink cartridge 630M cannot be inserted further frontward from the state illustrated in Fig. 25 ,
- the locking surface 451 of the ink cartridge 630M is positioned rearward of the lock shaft 145, i.e., the locking surface 451 is separated from the lock shaft 145 in the frontward direction 51, the locking surface 451 cannot engage with the lock shaft 145.
- the ink cartridge 630M is prevented from being attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the interfering surface 67bM of the ink cartridge 630M can prevent the ink cartridge 630M from being completely attached to the incorrect insertion space 111C (i.e., the ink cartridge 630M is prevented from being engaged with the lock shaft 145), although the ink supply potion 34 of the ink cartridge 630M is connected to the ink needle 102 of the incorrect insertion space 111C.
- This structure allows the user to realize that the ink cartridge 630M is inserted into the incorrect insertion space 111 (insertion space 111C), thereby encouraging the user to insert the ink cartridge 630M into the correct insertion space 111M.
- the controller 117 is configured to determine the type of the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on the presence/absence of the cutout 66 in the light-blocking plate 67, during insertion of the ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 and at the time of completion of the attachment of the ink cartridge 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the controller 117 may be configured to determine whether or not the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on presence/absence of the light-blocking plate 67.
- the controller 117 first determines in S101 whether or not the cover 114 is closed. Specifically, when the signal outputted from the cover sensor 115 changes to low level, the controller 117 determines that the cover 114 is at the closing position (S101: YES) and advances to the step S102. The controller 117 repeats the step S101 as long as the signal from the cover sensor 115 remains at high level and does not change to low level (S101: NO).
- the controller 117 determines in S102 whether or not accessing to the IC board 64 through the contacts 106 can be made. For example, the controller 117 may determine whether or not the accessing to the IC board 64 is possible based on: whether or not a specific voltage can be applied to the IC board 64 (i.e., based on absence or presence of the IC board 64); or whether or not the controller 117 can get access to a memory of the IC board 64.
- the controller 117 determines in S106 that the ink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. In this case, the controller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him that the ink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, for example, through a message such as "No Cartridge" on the display.
- the controller 117 determines in S103 whether the signal outputted from the optical sensor 113 is high level or low level. In case that the signal from the optical sensor 113 is a high level signal (S103: High), the controller 117 determines in S104 that an abnormal ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the optical sensor 113 is configured to output the high level signal in case that the light-blocking plate 67 is not provided at the attached ink cartridge 30.
- the controller 117 determines the attached ink cartridge 30 is abnormal.
- the controller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him so, for example, through a message such as "Abnormal Cartridge Attached" on the display.
- the controller 117 determines in S105 that the ink cartridge 30 is correctly attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110,
- the optical sensor 113 is configured to output the low level signal, since the light-blocking plate 67 of the attached ink cartridge 30 blocks the light emitted from the optical sensor 113.
- the controller 117 is configured to determine whether or not the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 by detecting the presence/absence of the light-blocking plate 67.
- the ink cartridge 30 is determined to be attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in case that: the controller 117 can access the IC board 64; and the light-blocking plate 67 blocks or attenuates the light from the optical sensor 113.
- the controller 117 may determine whether or not the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on whether or not accessing to the IC board 64 is possible; and the controller 117 is configured to determine the type of the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on the presence/absence of the cutout 66 in the light-blocking plate 67.
- the controller 117 may determine whether or not the ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on presence or absence of the light-blocking plate 67; and the controller 117 may further determine whether or not the attached ink cartridge 30 is abnormal based on whether or not accessing to the IC board 64 is possible. Assume in this case as well that the cutout 66 is not formed in each light-blocking plate 67.
- the controller 117 first determines in S201 whether or not the cover 114 is closed. Specifically, when the signal outputted from the cover sensor 115 changes to low level, the controller 117 determines that the cover 114 is at the closing position (S201: YES) and advances to the step S202. The controller 117 repeats the step S201 as long as the signal from the cover sensor 115 remains at high level and does not change to low level (S201: NO).
- the controller 117 determines in S202 whether the signal outputted from the optical sensor 113 is high level or low level.
- the optical sensor 113 is configured to output the high level signal in case that the light-blocking plate 67 is not provided at the attached ink cartridge 30 and thus the light from the optical sensor 113 is not blocked or attenuated by the light-blocking plate 67.
- the controller 117 determines in S206 that the ink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the controller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him so, for example, through a message such as "No Cartridge" on the display.
- the controller 117 determines in S203 whether or not accessing to the IC board 64 can be made. For example, the controller 117 may determine whether or not the accessing to the IC board 64 is possible based on: whether or not a specific voltage can be applied to the IC board 64 (i.e., based on absence or presence of the IC board 64); or whether or not the controller 117 can get access to a memory of the IC board 64.
- the controller 117 determines in S204 that the attached ink cartridge 30 is abnormal. In case that the controller 117 determines that the attached ink cartridge 30 is abnormal, the controller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him so, for example, through a message such as "Abnormal Cartridge Attached" on the display.
- the controller 117 determines in S205 that the ink cartridge 30 is correctly attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110.
- the ink cartridge 30 is pivotable about the center C of the ink supply port 71 to move between the first posture and the second posture.
- the pivot center may be positioned other than the ink supply port 71.
- the pivot center may be a prescribed position on a particular portion of an outer surface of the cylinder 75 that contacts the guide portion 105.
- the pivot center may be set to a position at which the member and the sub-lower wall 48 contact each other.
- the center C of the ink supply port 71 is defined as the pivot center, the ink needle 102 inserted in the ink supply port 71 is less likely to come off the packing 76 during pivotal movement of the ink cartridge 30 between the first posture and the second posture, thereby suppressing leakage of ink.
- the ink cartridge 30 may be configured to slide in the up-down direction to move between the first posture and the second posture.
- the cartridge body 31 may have a nesting structure configured of two separate members: an inner case and an outer case that houses the inner case therein.
- the inner case defines an ink chamber therein
- the outer case constitutes an outer shell of the cartridge body 31.
- the light-blocking plate 67 is connected to the raised portion 39A constituting the upper surface 39 of the ink cartridge 30.
- the upper surface 39 does not necessarily include the raised portion 39A, but may be a flat plane, as in the third modification shown in Figs. 23A and 23B .
- the light-blocking plate 67 is not necessarily connected to the rear portion 39A.
- ink cartridges 30C, 30M, 30Y and 30K adapted to be inserted into the designated insertion spaces 111C, 111M, 111Y and 111K, respectively, are provided as a set.
- more than four kinds of ink cartridges 30 may be provided as one set of the printing-fluid cartridges.
- the coil spring 78 of the ink supply portion 34 functions to urge the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 rearward.
- a different structure from the depicted configuration may be employed for urging the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 rearward.
- a spring for biasing the ink cartridge 30 rearward may be provided at a position other than the ink supply portion 34.
- a spring may be provided at the front surface 40 of the cartridge body 31 to extend frontward therefrom for urging the ink cartridges 30 rearward.
- a spring may be disposed at the end wall of the case 101 to extend rearward therefrom to urge the ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the rearward direction 52.
- the coil spring 98 is disposed within the air valve chamber 36 to move the valve 97 to open and close the air communication port 96.
- This coil spring 98 also serves to urge the ink cartridge 30 rearward in the depicted embodiment.
- a coil spring different from the coil spring 98 may be provided solely for urging the ink cartridge 30 in the rearward direction 52.
- a coil spring may be disposed at the connecting wall 95 or somewhere in an inner space defined in the upper cover 31U such that the coil spring does not serves to open the first ink chamber 32 to the atmosphere.
- the printing fluid of the present disclosure is not limited to ink.
- a pretreatment liquid that is ejected onto sheets prior to ink during a printing operation may be stored in the printing-fluid cartridge.
- cleaning water for cleaning the recoding head 21 may be stored in the printing-fluid cartridge.
- powder-like material having fluidity, such as toner may be used as the printing fluid.
- the ink cartridges 30, 230, 330, 430, 530 and 630M are respectively an example of a printing-fluid cartridge.
- the ink cartridge 30C is an example of a first printing-fluid cartridge.
- the ink cartridge 30M is an example of a second printing-fluid cartridge.
- the ink cartridge 30Y is an example of a third printing-fluid cartridge.
- the ink cartridge 30K is an example of a fourth printing-fluid cartridge.
- the ink cartridge 630M is also an example of a first printing-fluid cartridge.
- the first ink chamber 32, the second ink chamber 33, and the ink chamber 432 are an example of a storage chamber.
- the ink is an example of printing-fluid.
- the ink supply portions 34 and 434 are an example of a supply portion.
- the ink supply ports 71 and 471 are an example of a supply hole.
- the front surfaces 40, 340, 440, 540 and front surfaces of the connecting walls 49, 349 are an example of a front surface.
- the rear surfaces 41, 341, 441 and 541 are an example of a rear surface.
- the upper surfaces 39, 339, 439 and 539 are an example of an upper surface.
- the cartridge bodies 31, 331, 431 and 531 are an example of a housing.
- the locking surfaces 151 and 451 are an example of a locking surface.
- the light-blocking plates 67, 267, 467 and 567 are an example of a light-blocking wall.
- the IC boards 64, 464 and the electrodes 65 are an example of an electrical interface.
- the interfering surfaces 67b(67bM, 67bC, 67bY, 67bK), 285b, 467b, 567b are an example of an interfering surface.
- the cutout 66 is an example of a light-transmission portion.
- the valve 77 is an example of a closing member.
- the frontward direction 51 is an example of an insertion direction.
- the rearward direction 52 is an example of a removal direction.
- the left-right direction is an example of a widthwise direction.
- the lower case 31L is an example of a case, and the upper cover 31U is an example of an upper cover.
- the protrusion 285 is an example of a protrusion.
- the second protrusion 583 is an example of a protrusion.
- the lock shaft 145 is an example of a lock portion.
- the insertion spaces 111 are an example of insertion spaces.
- the insertion space 111C is an example of a first insertion space.
- the insertion space 111M is an example of a second insertion space.
- the insertion space 111Y is an example of a third insertion space 111Y.
- the contacts 106 are an example of a contact.
- the contacts 106 disposed in the insertion space 111C is an example of a first contact.
- the contacts 106 disposed in the insertion space 111M is an example of a second contact.
- the ink needle 102 is an example of a tube.
- the gate 108 is an example of a projection.
- the gate 108C disposed in the insertion space 111C is an example of a first projection.
- the gate 108M disposed in the insertion space 111M is an example of a second projection.
- the optical sensor 113 is an example of an optical sensor.
- the controller 117 is an example of a determiner.
- the opening 112 is an example of an opening.
- the cover 114 is an example of a cover.
- the cover sensor 115 is an example of a cover sensor.
- the printer 10 is an example of a printing-fluid consuming apparatus.
- the cartridge-attachment section 110 is an example of a cartridge-attachment section.
- the imaginary plane X2 is an example of an imaginary plane.
- the imaginary plane X3 is an example of a second imaginary plane.
Landscapes
- Ink Jet (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- The present disclosure relates to a printing-fluid cartridge, a set of the printing-fluid cartridges, and a system including a printing-fluid consuming apparatus and the printing-fluid cartridge mountable in the printing-fluid consuming apparatus.
- Conventionally, there have been known inkjet recording apparatuses configured to record images on recording mediums by ejecting ink stored in ink cartridges through nozzles. There is known an inkjet recording apparatus in which a new ink cartridge is mountable every time ink is consumed. In an inkjet recording apparatus capable of performing color printing, a plurality of ink cartridges can be mountable.
- For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No.
2007-261286 - There are various types of ink in terms of color or component, for example. In the inkjet recording apparatus capable of accommodating a plurality of ink cartridges, it is probable that a user may attempt to insert an ink cartridge into an incorrect location in the inkjet recording apparatus. Specifically, for example, an ink cartridge storing black ink may be erroneously inserted into a position into which an ink cartridge storing yellow ink should be inserted. In this case, assuming that information of an ink color is stored in the information memory storage, information relating to ink is read out from the information memory storage of the erroneously attached ink cartridge, thereby enabling a determination that the ink cartridge is attached to an incorrect position.
- However, if an ink cartridge storing black ink is attached to a position to which an ink cartridge storing yellow ink should be attached, black ink may flow out from the black ink cartridge and may be mixed with yellow ink that exists at a connection part of the inkjet recording apparatus. To eliminate such color mixture of ink, a large amount of ink should be purged, thereby consuming a large amount of ink. In order to avoid occurrence of such mixing of different colors of ink, conceivably, the ink cartridge may be provided with a particular portion whose shape serves as a key that corresponds to a shape (concave or convex shape, for example) indicative of the correct location in the inkjet recording apparatus so as to prevent connection of a wrong ink cartridge to the connection part. That is, since no ink cartridge can be connected to the connection part unless the key shape of the ink cartridge matches the corresponding concavo or convex shape of the inkjet recording apparatus, ink of a particular color is prevented from being mixed with other ink of a different color.
- However, during insertion of the ink cartridge, the concavo or convex shape provided in a correct location may be brought into contact with the information memory storage of the ink cartridge being inserted. In this case, conceivably, electrodes of the information memory storage may be damaged and, in a worst case, information stored in the information memory storage cannot become read out therefrom.
- In view of the foregoing, it is an object of the present disclosure to provide a structure that can prevent wrong insertion of a printing-fluid cartridge into a cartridge-attachment section of a printing-fluid consuming apparatus.
- (1) In order to attain the above and other objects, the present disclosure provides a printing-fluid cartridge configured to be inserted into a prescribed insertion space of a cartridge-attachment section in an insertion direction crossing a gravitational direction to be attached to the cartridge-attachment section in an attached posture. The printing-fluid cartridge includes a housing, a supply portion, an electrical interface and an interfering surface. The housing defines a width in a widthwise direction perpendicular to the insertion direction and the gravitational direction in the attached posture. The housing includes: a storage chamber configured to store printing fluid therein; a front surface facing frontward in the insertion direction in the attached posture. The rear surface away from the front surface in a removal direction opposite to the insertion direction in the attached posture; an upper surface extending between the front surface and the rear surface; and an upper surface extending between the front surface and the rear surface. The rear surface faces rearward in the attached posture. The storage chamber is positioned between the front surface and the rear surface in the insertion direction in the attached posture. The upper surface is positioned upward relative to the storage chamber and faces upward in the attached posture. The supply portion is provided at the front surface and has a supply hole. The printing fluid is configured to flow out of the storage chamber through the supply hole in the insertion direction in the attached posture. The electrical interface is disposed at the upper surface and faces upward in the attached posture. The interfering surface is positioned upward relative to the storage chamber in the attached posture and extends in the widthwise direction in the attached posture. The interfering surface is positioned downward and frontward in the insertion direction relative to the electrical interface in the attached posture. The interfering surface is configured to abut against a projection provided at another insertion space different from the prescribed insertion space of the cartridge-attachment section during an insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the another insertion space.
According to the above-described configuration, the interfering surface is positioned downward and frontward in the insertion direction relative to the electrical interface. With this structure, the projection provided in the prescribed insertion space (corresponding to the interfering surface) is less likely to contact the electrical interface during the insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the prescribed insertion space of the cartridge-attachment section. - (2) It is preferable that: the housing further includes an inner surface that defines a front edge of the storage chamber in the insertion direction in the attached posture; and the interfering surface is positioned rearward relative to the inner surface in the insertion direction in the attached posture.
- (3) It is preferable that the printing-fluid cartridge further includes a light-blocking wall disposed at the housing. The light-blocking wall is positioned rearward relative to the interfering surface in the insertion direction in the attached posture. The light-blocking wall includes a light-blocking surface extending in the insertion direction and the gravitational direction in the attached posture.
According to the above-described configuration, the light-blocking wall can allow detection of a type of the printing-fluid cartridge. - (4) It is preferable that the interfering surface and the light-blocldng wall are aligned with each other in the insertion direction.
This arrangement of the interfering surface and the light-blocking wall can realize downsizing of the light-blocking wall in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction. - (5) It is preferable that: the interfering surface has a first width in the widthwise direction; the upper surface has a first outer edge and a second outer edge opposite to each other in the widthwise direction; and the light-blocking wall has outer edges opposite to each other in the widthwise direction, the second outer edge of the upper surface being positioned closer to one of the outer edges of the light-blocking wall than the first outer edge is to the one of the outer edges of the light-blocking wall in the widthwise direction, the second outer edge of the upper surface and the one of the outer edges of the light-blocking wall defining a second width therebetween that is greater than the first width in the widthwise direction.
With this structure, there can be provided relatively wider spaces at both sides of the interfering surface and the light-blocking wall on the upper surface of the housing in the left-right direction. Thus, in the cartridge-attachment section, in regions corresponding to these spaces on the upper surface of the printing-fluid cartridge within the prescribed insertion space, those components configured to make access to the printing-fluid cartridge can be arranged. - (6) It is preferable that: the light-blocking wall includes a light-transmission portion configured to transmit light, the light-transmission portion extending in the widthwise direction.
With this structure, the type of the printing-fluid cartridge can be determined by detecting the presence or absence of the light-transmission portion of the light-blocking wall. - (7) It is preferable that: the light-blocking wall is configured to block light traveling in the widthwise direction at least one of: during insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the cartridge-attachment section; and in a state where the printing-fluid cartridge is attached to the cartridge-attachment section in the attached posture.
With this structure, by detecting presence and absence of the light-blocking wall at the time of completion of the insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the cartridge-attachment section, presence and absence of the printing-fluid cartridge in the cartridge-attachment section (attachment or non-attachment of the printing-fluid cartridge) can be determined. Alternatively, by detecting presence and absence of the light-blocking wall during the insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the cartridge-attachment section and at the time of completion of the attachment of the printing-fluid cartridge to the cartridge-attachment section, the type of the printing-fluid cartridge attached to the cartridge-attachment section can be determined. - (8) It is preferable that: the interfering surface constitutes a front surface of the light-blocking wall facing frontward in the insertion direction in the attached posture.
With this structure, the interfering surface can also be used as the light-blocking wall, and the structure of the interfering surface can be simplified. - (9) It is preferable that the light-blocking wall further includes: a sloped surface sloping relative to the insertion direction in the attached posture; and an upper surface facing upward in attached posture, the sloped surface connecting the interfering surface and the upper surface of the light-blocking wall, the sloped surface facing upward and frontward in the insertion direction in the attached posture.
This structure can reduce a possibility that the interfering surface and the light-blocking wall may be damaged when the printing-fluid cartridge is dropped on the floor with the upper surface facing downward. - (10) It is preferable that the printing-fluid cartridge further includes a protrusion positioned frontward relative to the light-blocking wall in the insertion direction in the attached posture, the protrusion including the interfering surface.
With this structure, by separately providing the interfering surface from the light-blocking wall, impact, which will be impinged on the interfering surface at the time of wrong insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge, can be prevented from being directly transmitted to the light-blocking wall. - (11) It is preferable that the protrusion is made of a material configured to transmit light.
With this structure, the protrusion does not disturb detection of the light-blocking wall during insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the prescribed insertion space of the cartridge-attachment section. - (12) It is preferable that the printing-fluid cartridge further includes a protrusion disposed at the upper surface and supporting the electrical interface, the electrical interface being positioned upward relative to the upper surface in the attached posture, the light-blocking wall being positioned frontward relative to the protrusion in the insertion direction in the attached posture, the light-blocking wall being connected to the protrusion.
- (13) It is preferable that: the housing includes an upper cover defining the upper surface in the attached posture, the upper cover being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber in the attached posture; and the light-blocking wall is formed integrally with the upper cover.
With this structure, the manufacture of the light-blocking wall can be simplified. - (14) It is preferable that: the light-blocking wall is disposed at the upper surface and includes the interfering surface.
With this structure, the structure of the interfering surface can be simplified. - (15) It is preferable that: the housing includes an upper cover defining the upper surface in the attached posture, the upper cover being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber in the attached posture; and the interfering surface extends upward from the upper cover in the attached posture.
- (16) It is preferable that: the interfering surface and the electrical interface are arranged at different positions from each other in the widthwise direction.
With this structure, the projection corresponding to the interfering surface is further less likely to make contact with the electrical interface during the insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the prescribed insertion space of the cartridge-attachment section. - (17) It is preferable that the printing-fluid cartridge further includes a closing member configured to close the supply hole, a distance between the interfering surface and the closing member in the insertion direction is shorter than a distance between the projection and a tip end of a tube provided at the cartridge-attachment section in the insertion direction.
With this structure, when the interfering surface of the printing-fluid cartridge abuts against the projection provided at the another insertion space, the closing member is prevented from being opened by the tube provided at the another insertion space. - (18) It is preferable that the printing-fluid cartridge further includes a locking surface positioned upward relative to the storage chamber and configured to contact a lock portion provided at the cartridge-attachment section, the locking surface facing rearward in the insertion direction in the attached posture, a distance between the interfering surface and the locking surface in the insertion direction is longer than a distance between the projection and the lock portion in the insertion direction.
With this structure, when the interfering surface of the printing-fluid cartridge abuts against the projection provided at the another insertion space, the printing-fluid cartridge is prevented from being engaged with the lock portion provided at the another insertion space. Accordingly, the user can realize that the printing-fluid cartridge is incorrectly inserted into the another insertion space, rather than into the prescribed insertion space. - (19) It is preferable that: the housing including: an upper cover defining the upper surface in the attached posture, the upper cover being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber in the attached posture; and a locking surface provided at the upper cover and configured to contact a lock portion provided at the cartridge-attachment section, the locking surface facing rearward in the insertion direction in the attached posture, the locking surface having an upper end in the attached posture; and the electrical interface is positioned downward and frontward in the insertion direction relative to the upper end of the locking surface in the attached posture.
With this structure, the lock portion corresponding to the locking surface is suppressed from making contact with the electrical interface and the interfering surface during the insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the prescribed insertion space of the cartridge-attachment section. - (20) It is preferable that the housing includes: a case defining the storage chamber therein; and an upper cover attached to the case and defining the upper surface in the attached posture, the upper cover being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber in the attached posture, the electrical interface and the interfering surface being disposed at the upper cover.
The electrical interface stores information relating to a type of the printing-fluid cartridge. A shape and position of the interfering surface may indicate the type of the printing-fluid cartridge. Accordingly, with this structure, since the electrical interface and the interfering surface are both provided at the upper cover, the case can be made common to the printing-fluid cartridges, irrespective of the types of the printing-fluid cartridge. - (21) According to another aspect, the present disclosure also provides a set of the above printing-fluid cartridges. The printing-fluid cartridges include a first printing-fluid cartridge and a second printing-fluid cartridge. The first printing-fluid cartridge stores printing fluid of a first type and the second printing-fluid cartridge stores printing fluid of a second type different from the first type. The upper surface of each of the printing-fluid cartridges has a first outer edge and a second outer edge opposite to each other in the widthwise direction. The interfering surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge is positioned closer to the first outer edge in the widthwise direction than the interfering surface of the second printing-fluid cartridge is to the first outer edge in the widthwise direction. That is, the position of the interfering surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge in the widthwise direction is different from the position of the interfering surface of the second printing-fluid cartridge in the widthwise direction.
- (22) It is preferable that the printing-fluid cartridges further include a third printing-fluid cartridge storing printing fluid of a third type different from the first type and the second type. In this case, it is preferable that: each of the printing-fluid cartridges defines an imaginary plane passing through a center of the electrical interface in the widthwise direction and extending parallel to the insertion direction and the gravitational direction; the first printing-fluid cartridge and the third printing-fluid cartridge are configured to be inserted respectively into a first insertion space and a third insertion space positioned opposite to each other with respect to a second insertion space in the widthwise direction, the second printing-fluid cartridge being configured to be inserted into the second insertion space; the interfering surface of the second printing-fluid cartridge is positioned on the imaginary plane in the widthwise direction; the interfering surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge is positioned offset from the imaginary plane toward the first outer edge in the widthwise direction; and the interfering surface of the third printing-fluid cartridge is positioned offset from the imaginary plane toward the second outer edge in the widthwise direction.
- (23) It is preferable that the printing-fluid cartridges further include a fourth printing-fluid cartridge storing printing fluid of a fourth type different from the first type and the second type and the third type. In this case, it is preferable that: the housing of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge having a width in the widthwise direction that is greater than the width of the housing of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge, the second printing-fluid cartridge and the third printing-fluid cartridge in the widthwise direction; the upper surface of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge has a third outer edge and a fourth outer edge opposite to each other in the widthwise direction, the third outer edge of the upper surface of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge corresponding to the first outer edge of the upper surface of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge, the second printing-fluid cartridge and the third printing-fluid cartridge, the fourth outer edge of the upper surface of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge being positioned farther away from the imaginary plane than the second outer edge of the upper surface of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge, the second printing-fluid cartridge and the third printing-fluid cartridge is from the imaginary plane in the widthwise direction; and the interfering surface of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge is arranged opposite to the imaginary plane with respect to a second imaginary plane in the widthwise direction, the second imaginary plane being parallel to the imaginary plane and defining the second outer edge of the upper surface of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge, the second printing-fluid cartridge and the third printing-fluid cartridge in the widthwise direction.
The insertion space into which the fourth printing-fluid cartridge is inserted (fourth insertion space) has a wider width than the width of the each of the first insertion space, the second insertion space and the third insertion space in the widthwise direction. In the fourth insertion space, a projection corresponding to the interfering surface of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge is positioned opposite to the imaginary plane with respect to the second imaginary plane (the second outer edge of the upper surface of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge, the second printing-fluid cartridge and the third printing-fluid cartridge in the widthwise direction) in the widthwise direction. This structure can prevent incorrect insertion of the first printing-fluid cartridge, the second printing-fluid cartridge and the third printing-fluid cartridge into the fourth insertion space. - (24) According to still another aspect, the disclosure also provides a system including a plurality of the above-described printing-fluid cartridges, and a printing-fluid consuming apparatus including the cartridge-attachment section and a determiner. The cartridge-attachment section includes: a plurality of insertion spaces into each of which each of the plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges is configured to be inserted in the insertion direction, the plurality of insertion spaces including a first insertion space and a second insertion space; a plurality of tubes each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces; a plurality of contacts each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces, the plurality of contacts including a first contact and a second contact, the first contact being disposed in the first insertion space and the second contact being disposed in the second insertion space; a plurality of projections each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces; and a plurality of optical sensors each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces. Each of the projections is positioned frontward relative to the corresponding contact in the insertion direction in each of the insertion spaces, the plurality of projections including a first projection and a second projection, the first projection being disposed in the first insertion space and the second projection being disposed in the second insertion space, a relative position between the first projection and the first contact in the widthwise direction in the first insertion space being different from a relative position between the second projection and the second contact in the widthwise direction in the second insertion space. Each of the optical sensors is positioned frontward relative to the corresponding projection in the insertion direction in each of the insertion spaces. The determiner is configured to determine types of the printing-fluid cartridges inserted into the respective insertion spaces based on signals outputted from the respective optical sensors.
- (25) It is preferable that: the printing-fluid cartridges include a first printing-fluid cartridge configured to be inserted into the first insertion space and a second printing-fluid cartridge configured to be inserted into the second insertion space; each of the plurality of projections includes a pair of opposing walls and a slit provided between the opposing walls in the widthwise direction, the first projection including a first slit and the second projection including a second slit, a relative position between the first slit and the first contact in the widthwise direction in the first insertion space being different from a relative position between the second slit and the second contact in the widthwise direction in the second insertion space. In this case, it is preferable that: the opposing walls of the first projection is configured to abut against the interfering surface of the second printing-fluid cartridge during insertion of the second printing-fluid cartridge into the first insertion space until the second printing-fluid cartridge becomes the attached posture; and the first slit of the first projection is configured to allow the interfering surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge to pass through the first slit during insertion of the first printing-fluid cartridge into the first insertion space until the first printing-fluid cartridge becomes the attached posture.
- (26) It is preferable that: in case that the light-blocking wall includes the light-transmission portion, the light-transmission portion is configured to transmit light emitted from the corresponding optical sensor.
With this structure, the type of the printing-fluid cartridge can be determined by detecting the presence or absence of the light-transmission portion of the light-blocking wall. - (27) It is preferable that the cartridge-attachment section further includes: an opening through which the plurality of printing-fluid cartridges is allowed to be inserted into the corresponding plurality of insertion spaces; a cover movable between a closing position closing the opening and an opening position exposing the opening; and a cover sensor configured to detect that the cover is in the closing position and output a detection signal indicative of the cover being at the closing position. In this case, preferably, upon receipt of the detection signal from the cover sensor, the determiner is configured to detect types of the printing-fluid cartridges inserted into the corresponding plurality of insertion spaces based on signals outputted from the respective optical sensors.
- (28) It is preferable that: the plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges includes a first printing-fluid cartridge configured to the inserted into the first insertion space; and the supply portion of the first printing-fluid cartridge and the tube of the second insertion space are separated from each other in the insertion direction in a state where the interfering surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge abuts against the projection provided in the second insertion space during the insertion of the first printing-fluid cartridge into the second insertion space.
This structure can prevent connection of the supply portion of the first printing-fluid cartridge to the tube of the second insertion space, thereby preventing the printing-fluid of the first printing-fluid cartridge from flowing into the tube of the second insertion space. - (29) It is preferable that: the plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges includes a first printing-fluid cartridge configured to the inserted into the first insertion space, the first printing-fluid cartridges including a locking surface positioned upward relative to the storage chamber in the attached posture; the cartridge-attachment section further includes a lock portion configured to engage the locking surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge in the attached posture; and the supply portion of the first printing-fluid cartridge and the tube of the second insertion space are connected to each other and the locking surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge is separated from the lock portion in the insertion direction in a state where the interfering surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge abuts against the projection provided at the second insertion space during the insertion of the first printing-fluid cartridge into the second insertion space.
- With this structure, the locking surface cannot engage with the lock portion, a wrongly inserted printing-fluid cartridge cannot be attached to the cartridge-attachment section. Thus, the user can realize that the incorrect insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge, and the user is encouraged to insert the printing-fluid cartridge into the correct insertion space.
- The structure according to the present disclosure can prevent wrong insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge into the cartridge-attachment section of the printing-fluid consuming apparatus.
- In the drawings,
-
Fig. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional diagram conceptually showing an internal configuration of a printer including a cartridge-attachment section configured to detachably accommodate ink cartridges according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; -
Fig. 2 is a perspective view showing an external appearance of the cartridge-attachment section and an opening of the cartridge-attachment section; -
Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the cartridge-attachment section taken along a plane III-III inFig. 4 , the cartridge-attachment section including gates formed with slits, wherein two of the ink cartridges according to the embodiment are inserted into corresponding insertion spaces; -
Fig. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional diagram illustrating a state where the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment is attached to the cartridge-attachment section in a first posture; -
Fig. 5A is an enlarged cross-sectional view of an enclosed region VB illustrated inFig. 4 ; -
Fig. 5B is an enlarged cross-sectional view of an enclosed region VA illustrated inFig. 4 ; -
Fig. 6 is a perspective view of the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment when viewed from a perspective frontward and upward thereof; -
Fig. 7 is a perspective view of the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment when viewed from a perspective rearward and upward thereof; -
Fig. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment taken along an imaginary plane X2 illustrated inFig. 9B and showing an internal configuration of the ink cartridge according to the embodiment; -
Fig. 9A is a left side view of the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment and illustrating arrangement of parts disposed at an upper surface of the ink cartridge according to the embodiment; -
Fig. 9B is a rear side view of the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment; -
Fig. 10 is a left side view of the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment and illustrating positional relationship among various parts of the ink cartridge in the front-rear direction and up-down direction; -
Fig. 11A is a perspective view of the ink cartridge of black color according to the embodiment when viewed from a perspective rearward and upward thereof; -
Fig. 11B is a rear side view of the ink cartridge of black color according to the embodiment; -
Fig. 12 is a perspective view of the ink cartridge of black color according to the embodiment when viewed from a perspective frontward and upward thereof; -
Figs. 13A through 13D are top views of the ink cartridges of colors of black, magenta, cyan and yellow, respectively, according to the embodiment; -
Fig. 14 is a top view of the ink cartridge of black color according to the embodiment; -
Fig. 15 is a top view of the ink cartridge of magenta color according to the embodiment; -
Fig. 16 is a vertical cross-sectional diagram illustrating a state where the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment is inserted in the corresponding insertion space of the cartridge-attachment section; -
Fig. 17 is a vertical cross-sectional diagram illustrating a state where the ink cartridge (of magenta color) according to the embodiment is inserted further frontward in the corresponding insertion space of the cartridge-attachment section after the state illustrated inFig. 16 and is in a second posture in the corresponding insertion space; -
Fig. 18 is a vertical cross-sectional diagram illustrating a state where the ink cartridge (of cyan color) is inserted in the insertion space for the ink cartridge of magenta color and a light-blocking plate (interfering surface) of the ink cartridge (of cyan color) is in abutment with the gate for the ink cartridge of magenta color; -
Fig. 19 is a flow chart illustrating steps of a process to determine types of the ink cartridges according to the embodiment attached to the cartridge-attachment section performed by a controller of the printer; -
Fig. 20 is a left side view of an ink cartridge according to a first modification to the embodiment; -
Fig. 21 is a left side view of an ink cartridge according to a second modification to the embodiment; -
Fig. 22 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the ink cartridge according to the second modification to the embodiment; -
Fig. 23A is a perspective view of an ink cartridge according to a third modification to the embodiment; -
Fig. 23B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the ink cartridge according to the third modification to the embodiment taken along a plane XXIIB-XXIIB shown inFig. 23A ; -
Fig. 24 is a vertical cross-sectional view of an ink cartridge according to a fourth modification to the embodiment; -
Fig. 25 is a vertical cross-sectional view of an ink cartridge according to a fifth modification to the embodiment; -
Fig. 26 is a flow chart illustrating steps of a process according to a variation of the embodiment performed by the controller of the printer to determine whether the ink cartridge according to the embodiment is attached to the cartridge-attachment section; and -
Fig. 27 is a flow chart illustrating steps of a process according to another variation of the embodiment performed by the controller of the printer to determine whether the ink cartridge according to the embodiment is attached to the cartridge-attachment section. - Hereinafter, an embodiment of the disclosure is described in detail while referring to accompanying drawings. It would be apparent to those skilled in the art that the embodiment described below is merely an example of the present disclosure and modifications and variations may be made therein without departing from the scope of the disclosure.
- In the following description, a
frontward direction 51 is defined as a direction in which anink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment is inserted into a cartridge-attachment section 110, while arearward direction 52 is defined as a direction opposite thefrontward direction 51, that is, a direction in which theink cartridge 30 is extracted from the cartridge-attachment section 110. Thefrontward direction 51 andrearward direction 52 are horizontal in the present embodiment. - Further, a
downward direction 53 is defined as a direction perpendicular to thefrontward direction 51 or therearward direction 52, while anupward direction 54 is defined as a direction opposite thedownward direction 53. Further, arightward direction 55 and aleftward direction 56 are defined as directions perpendicular to thefrontward direction 51 and thedownward direction 53. Therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56 are also parallel to a horizontal plane in the present embodiment. - In a state where the
ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 (in an attached state) and theink cartridge 30 is capable of being used or operated by theprinter 10, thedownward direction 53 is coincident with a direction of a gravitational force acting on the ink cartridge 30 (i.e. gravitational direction), and theupward direction 54 is coincident with a direction opposite to the gravitational direction. Further, therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56 are defined as directions perpendicular to thefrontward direction 51 and thedownward direction 53. More specifically, in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 and is capable of being used by theprinter 10, therightward direction 55 is a direction toward the right and theleftward direction 56 is a direction toward the left when theink cartridge 30 is viewed from a rear side thereof. - Note that a state where the
ink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 or a state where theink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by theprinter 10 implies a state of theink cartridge 30 when theink cartridge 30 has been completely inserted into an attachment position in thecartridge attachment section 110. Hereinafter, a posture of theink cartridge 30 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecartridge attachment section 110 or a state where theink cartridge 30 is capable of being operated by theprinter 10 will be referred to as an "attached posture." - In other words, in the attached posture, the
ink cartridge 30 has a height in the gravitational direction; a depth in thefrontward direction 51 or in the rearward direction 52 (i.e., insertion direction) which is orthogonal to the gravitational direction; and a width in therightward direction 55 or in the leftward direction 56 (i.e., widthwise direction) which is orthogonal to the gravitational direction (height) and the insertion direction (depth). - Further, in the following description, the
frontward direction 51 and therearward direction 52 may be collectively referred to as a front-rear direction. Theupward direction 54 and thedownward direction 53 may be collectively referred to as an up-down direction. Therightward direction 55 and theleftward direction 56 may be collectively referred to as a left-right direction. - In this specification, "facing frontward" includes facing in a direction including a frontward component, "facing rearward" includes facing in a direction including a rearward component, "facing downward" includes facing in a direction including a downward component, and "facing upward" includes facing in a direction including an upward component. For example, "a front surface faces frontward" denotes that the front surface may face in a frontward direction, or the front surface may face in a direction inclined relative to the frontward direction.
-
Fig. 1 shows asystem 1 configured of aprinter 10 and theink cartridge 30 according to the embodiment. First, a detailed structure of theprinter 10 according to the embodiment will be described with reference toFig. 1 . - The
printer 10 is configured to form an image by selectively ejecting ink droplets onto a sheet based on an inkjet recording system. As illustrated inFig. 1 , theprinter 10 includes arecording head 21, an ink-supplyingdevice 100, andink tubes 20 connecting therecording head 21 to the ink-supplyingdevice 100. The ink-supplyingdevice 100 includes the cartridge-attachment section 110. The cartridge-attachment section 110 can detachably accommodate a plurality ofink cartridges 30 therein. - Specifically, in the present embodiment, four
ink cartridges corresponding insertion spaces attachment section 110. Hereinafter, whenever necessary, theink cartridges ink cartridge 30" or "ink cartridges 30" when no color distinction is necessary. Likewise, theinsertion spaces attachment section 110 may be referred to as "insertion space 111" or "insertion spaces 111" when no color distinction is necessary. - The cartridge-
attachment section 110 has a wall formed with anopening 112. Theink cartridges 30 can be inserted into the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the frontward direction 51 (i.e., insertion direction orthogonal to the gravitational direction) through theopening 112, and extracted from the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the rearward direction 52 (i.e., removal direction orthogonal to the gravitational direction) through theopening 112. - Each
ink cartridge 30 stores ink therein that theprinter 10 can use for printing. Theink cartridges 30 are connected to therecording head 21 through the correspondingink tubes 20 when theink cartridges 30 are completely mounted in the cartridge-attachment section 110. - The
recording head 21 includessub tanks 28 each serving to temporarily store ink supplied from the correspondingink cartridge 30 through the correspondingink tube 20. Therecording head 21 also includes a plurality ofnozzles 29 through which the ink supplied from thesub tanks 28 is selectively ejected in accordance with the inkjet recording system. More specifically, therecording head 21 includes a head control board (not shown), andpiezoelectric elements 29A each corresponding to one of thenozzles 29. The head control board is configured to selectively apply drive voltages to thepiezoelectric elements 29A to eject ink of each color selectively from thenozzles 29. In this way, therecording head 21 is configured to consume the ink stored in therespective ink cartridges 30 mounted in the cartridge-attachment section 110. - The
printer 10 also includes asheet tray 15, asheet feeding roller 23, a conveyingpath 24, a pair of conveyingrollers 25, aplaten 26, a pair ofdischarge rollers 27, and asheet discharge tray 16. The sheets from thesheet tray 15 are fed by thesheet feeding roller 23 onto the conveyingpath 24, and then conveyed by the conveyingrollers 25 onto theplaten 26. Therecording head 21 is configured to selectively eject ink onto the sheets as the sheets move over theplaten 26, thereby recording images on the sheets. The sheets that have passed theplaten 26 are then discharged by thedischarge rollers 27 onto thesheet discharge tray 16 disposed at a downstream end of the conveyingpath 24. - The ink-supplying
device 100 is provided in theprinter 10, as illustrated inFig. 1 . The ink-supplyingdevice 100 functions to supply ink to therecording head 21. As described above, the ink-supplyingdevice 100 includes the cartridge-attachment section 110 for detachably receive theink cartridges 30 therein.Fig. 1 depicts a state where one of theink cartridges 30 has been completely received in the cartridge-attachment section 110. In other words, theink cartridge 30 depicted inFig. 1 is in the attached posture in which theink cartridge 30 is used by theprinter 10. - In the ink-supplying
device 100, theink cartridges ink cartridges 30 corresponding to the colors of cyan, magenta, yellow and black) are detachably mountable. Specifically, as illustrated inFigs. 1 through 3 , the cartridge-attachment section 110 includes acase 101, and four sets of anink needle 102, atank 103, anoptical sensor 113, fourcontacts 106, arod 125, apositioning portion 107 and agate 108, each set for each of the fourink cartridges - The
case 101 constitutes a housing of the cartridge-attachment section 110. As depicted inFig. 2 , thecase 101 has a box-like shape defining an internal space therein. Specifically, thecase 101 includes a top wall defining a ceiling of the internal space, a bottom wall defining a bottom of the internal space, an end wall connecting the top wall and the bottom wall, and theopening 112 positioned opposite the end wall in the front-rear direction. Theopening 112 can be exposed to a surface (user-interface surface) that a user can face when using theprinter 10. - The four kinds of
ink cartridges 30 can be inserted into and removed from thecase 101 through theopening 112. In thecase 101, the bottom wall is formed with fourguide grooves 109 for guiding insertion/removal of thecorresponding ink cartridges 30. Specifically, when theink cartridges 30 are inserted into and removed from thecase 101 through theopening 112, lower ends of therespective ink cartridges 30 are received in thecorresponding guide grooves 109 and guided thereby in the front-rear direction inFig. 2 . Further, thecase 101 includes threeplates 104 that partition the internal space into the fourinsertion spaces respective insertion spaces direction ink cartridges insertion spaces - As illustrated in
Fig. 2 , when thecase 101 is viewed from rearward thereof in theforward direction 51, the fourinsertion spaces case 101 are arranged in this order from the left end to the right. Specifically, theink cartridge 30C is adapted to be inserted into theinsertion space 111C. Theink cartridge 30M is adapted to be inserted into theinsertion space 111M. Theink cartridge 30Y is adapted to be inserted into theinsertion space 111Y. Theink cartridge 30K is adapted to be inserted into theinsertion space 111K. That is, when theink cartridges 30 are accommodated in thecase 101, theink cartridge 30M is interposed between theink cartridges ink cartridge 30K has a left-right dimension larger than a left-right dimension of each of theink cartridges insertion space 111K has a left-right dimension that is larger than a left-right dimension of each of theinsertion spaces - Each
ink needle 102 is formed of a resin and has a generally hollow tubular shape. As illustrated inFig. 2 , the ink needles 102 are disposed at a lower end portion of the end wall constituting thecase 101. Specifically, eachink needle 102 is disposed at a position corresponding to an ink supply potion 34 (described later) of thecorresponding ink cartridge 30 mounted in the cartridge-attachment section 110. The respective ink needles 102 protrude rearward from the end wall of thecase 101. Theink needle 102 has adistal end 102E facing rearward. - A cylindrical-shaped
guide portion 105 is provided at the end wall to surround each of the ink needles 102. Eachguide portion 105 protrudes rearward from the end wall. Eachguide portion 105 has a protruding end that is open rearward. Specifically, eachink needle 102 is positioned at a diametrical center of thecorresponding guide portion 105. Eachguide portion 105 is shaped to allow theink supply potion 34 of thecorresponding ink cartridge 30 to be received in thecorresponding guide portion 105. - During insertion of the
ink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 in thefrontward direction 51, i.e., in a process for moving theink cartridge 30 to the attached posture, theink supply potion 34 of theink cartridge 30 enters into the corresponding guide portion 105 (refer toFig. 4 ). As theink cartridge 30 is inserted further forward in thefrontward direction 51, theink needle 102 enters into anink supply port 71 of the correspondingink supply potion 34. Theink needle 102 is thus connected to the correspondingink supply potion 34 to allow communication with each other. Hence, the ink stored in asecond ink chamber 33 formed inside theink cartridge 30 is allowed to flow into thecorresponding tank 103 through anink valve chamber 35 defined in theink supply potion 34 and an inner space defined in thecorresponding ink needle 102. - Incidentally, the
distal end 102E of eachink needle 102 may have a flat shape or a pointed shape. Theguide portions 105 may be formed into any shape, provided that theguide portions 105 can allow attachment of theink cartridges 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110. Theguide portions 105 need not necessarily be provided in the cartridge-attachment section 110. - A set of the four
contacts 106 is provided for each of the fourinsertion spaces 111 of thecase 101. Precisely, thecontacts 106 are provided in a holder (not shown) that is supported by the cartridge-attachment section 110. As illustrated inFig. 4 , each of the four sets of thecontacts 106 is disposed at the top wall of thecase 101, for eachinsertion space 111, at a position near the end wall of thecase 101. Each set of the fourcontacts 106 is disposed rearward relative to thecorresponding ink needle 102. Each of the fourcontacts 106 protrude from a lower surface of the top wall downward toward thecorresponding insertion space 111 of thecase 101. Although not illustrated in detail in the drawings, the fourcontacts 106 in each set are arranged to be spaced apart from one another in the left-right direction. The fourcontacts 106 in each set are arranged at positions respectively corresponding to fourelectrodes 65 provided at each of theink cartridges 30, as will be described later. Eachcontact 106 is formed of a material having electrical conductivity and resiliency. Thecontacts 106 are therefore upwardly resiliently deformable. - In the present embodiment, the four sets of the four
contacts 106 are disposed each set for each of the fourink cartridges contacts 106 are provided at thecase 101. However, the number ofcontacts 106 and the number ofelectrodes 65 may be arbitrary. - Each
contact 106 is electrically connected to an arithmetic-logic unit via an electrical circuit. In the present embodiment, eachcontact 106 is connected to a controller 117 (seeFig. 1 ) provided in the cartridge-attachment section 110. Thecontroller 117 may include a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, for example. Thecontacts 106 are engaged with the correspondingelectrodes 65 when theink cartridge 30 is attached to thecase 101. When in contact with the correspondingelectrodes 65, thecontacts 106 are electrically connected to the correspondingelectrodes 65, so that a voltage Vc is applied to one of theelectrodes 65; another one of theelectrodes 65 is grounded; signals are exchanged between thecontroller 117 and another one of theelectrodes 65; and power is supplied to another one of theelectrodes 65. Due to establishment of the electrical connection between thecontacts 106 and theelectrodes 65, thecontroller 117 is electrically accessible to the data stored in an IC of eachink cartridge 30. Outputs from therespective contacts 106 through the electrical circuits are configured to be inputted into thecontroller 117. - As illustrated in
Fig. 4 , eachrod 125 is provided at the end wall of thecase 101 at a position upward of thecorresponding ink needle 102 for eachinsertion space 111. Eachrod 125 has a generally cylindrical shape and protrudes rearward from the end wall of thecase 101. In a state where theink cartridges 30 are attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, that is, when theink cartridges 30 are in the attached posture, therods 125 are respectively received in air communication ports 96 (described later) of thecorresponding ink cartridges 30. - As illustrated in
Fig. 4 , theoptical sensors 113 are disposed at the top wall of thecase 101. Specifically, eachoptical sensor 113 is disposed, for eachinsertion space 111, at a position rearward of thecorresponding rod 125 but frontward of the set of fourcontacts 106. Eachoptical sensor 113 includes a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion. The light-emitting portion is arranged to oppose the light-receiving portion and is spaced apart from the light-receiving portion in the left-right direction. When theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, a light-blockingplate 67 of the attachedink cartridge 30 is located between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the correspondingoptical sensor 113. In other words, the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion are arranged to oppose each other with the light-blockingplate 67 of theink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 interposed between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion. - The
optical sensor 113 is configured to output different detection signals depending on whether or not light emitted in the left-right direction from the light-emitting portion is received by the light-receiving portion. For example, theoptical sensor 113 outputs a low-level signal when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is not received at the light-receiving portion (that is, when an intensity of the light received at the light-receiving portion is less than a predetermined intensity). On the other hand, theoptical sensor 113 outputs a high-level signal when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion is received by the light-receiving portion (that is, when the intensity of the received light is equal to or greater than the predetermined intensity). - As illustrated in
Fig. 4 , alock shaft 145 is also provided at thecase 101. Thelock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction at a position near the top wall and theopening 112 of thecase 101. Thelock shaft 145 is disposed rearward of thecontacts 106. Thelock shaft 145 is a rod-like member extending in the left-right direction. For example, thelock shaft 145 is a columnar-shaped metal. Thelock shaft 145 has both ends that are fixed to walls defining both ends of thecase 101 in the left-right direction. Accordingly, thelock shaft 145 is not movable (for example, is not pivotable) relative to thecase 101. Thelock shaft 145 extends in the left-right direction across the fourinsertion spaces 111 respectively corresponding to the fourink cartridges 30. In each of theinsertion spaces 111, a space is provided around thelock shaft 145. Thus, a locking surface 151 (described later) of eachink cartridge 30 can access thelock shaft 145 by moving upward or rearward. - The
lock shaft 145 functions to maintain theink cartridges 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the attached state. When theink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge-attachment section 110 and pivoted into a posture to be used thereby (i.e., attached posture), theink cartridge 30 is brought into engagement with thelock shaft 145 in thecorresponding insertion space 111. Further, thelock shaft 145 holds theink cartridge 30 in the attached posture in the cartridge-attachment section 110 against urging forces ofcoil springs 78 and 98 (described later) of theink cartridge 30 that push theink cartridge 30 as a whole rearward. - As illustrated in
Fig. 4 , the positioningportions 107 are arranged near the top wall of thecase 101. Eachpositioning portion 107 is disposed between the corresponding set ofcontacts 106 and thelock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction. The positioningportions 107 protrude downward from the top wall of thecase 101. The positioningportions 107 are integrally formed with thecase 101. Eachpositioning portion 107 has a lower end surface that is configured to abut against acontact surface 84 of thecorresponding ink cartridge 30 in the state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 (in the attached posture). The lower end surface of eachpositioning portion 107 is positioned slightly upward relative to the lower ends of the correspondingcontacts 106. - As illustrated in
Figs. 3 and4 , the gates 108 (specifically,gates case 101. Eachgate 108 protrudes downward from a wall defining an upper edge of eachinsertion space 111. Eachgate 108 is provided for eachinsertion space 111 at a position between the correspondingoptical sensor 113 and the set ofcontacts 106 in the front-rear direction. Referring toFig. 3 , eachgate 108 includes a pair of opposingwalls 118 and aslit 119 provided between the opposingwalls 118. The opposingwalls 118 extend respectively in the left-right direction from neighboring partitioning members that oppose each other in the right-left direction and that define thecorresponding insertion space 111, such as the neighboring twoplates 104. The opposingwalls 118 extend in the up-down direction and are paired to oppose each other in the left-right direction with a gap defined therebetween. This gap between the paired opposingwalls 118 serve as theslit 119 in eachgate 108. Put another way, each slit 119 is defined by two opposing end faces of the paired opposingwalls 118 extending in the up-down direction. However, the slits 119 (slits respective insertion spaces slits contacts 106 in therespective insertion spaces Fig. 3 , while theslit 119M of thegate 108M is positioned at a generally left-right center of theinsertion space 111M, the slit 119C of thegate 108C is positioned offset from a left-right center of theinsertion space 111C (i.e., rightward relative to the left-right center of theinsertion space 111C). The respective slits 119C, 119M, 119Y and 119K in theinsertion spaces ink cartridges slit 119 has a width in the left-right direction that is larger than a width of the corresponding light-blockingplate 67 in the left-right direction (defined as a width W1 illustrated inFigs. 14 and15 ). That is, the light-blockingplates slits - As illustrated in
Fig. 1 , eachtank 103 is provided forward of thecase 101 and is connected to thecorresponding ink needle 102. Thetank 103 has a box-like shape that allows ink to be stored therein. Anatmosphere communication port 124 is formed at an upper portion of eachtank 103 so that thetank 103 can be opened to the atmosphere through theatmosphere communication port 124. Thetank 103 has an inner space that communicates with the inner space of theink needle 102. With this structure, ink can flow out from theink cartridge 30 through theink needle 102 and is stored in thetank 103. Eachtank 103 is also connected to thecorresponding ink tube 20. Thus, the ink stored in the inner space of eachtank 103 is supplied to therecording head 21 through the correspondingink tube 20. - As illustrated in
Fig. 1 , the cartridge-attachment section 110 also includes acover 114, and acover sensor 115. Thecover 114 is configured to open and close theopening 112 of thecase 101. Thecover 114 extends in the left-right direction. Thecover 114 is pivotally movable relative to thecase 101 about ashaft 116 provided near a lower end of thecase 101. Thecover 114 has a substantially flat-plate shape and constitutes a part of the outer surface of theprinter 10. Thecover sensor 115 is configured to detect whether or not thecover 114 is in a closing position that closes theopening 112. - In a state illustrated in
Fig. 1 , thecover 114 is at the closing position. Thecover 114 at the closing position extends upward relative to theshaft 116. When thecover 114 is at the closing position, theopening 112 of thecase 101 is closed. At this time, a user cannot perform insertion and removal of theink cartridges 30 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110. Thecover sensor 115 is disposed at such a position that thecover sensor 115 can detect presence of a portion of thecover 114 at the closing position. To move thecover 114 from the closing position to an opening position opening theopening 112, thecover 114 is pivoted about theshaft 116 to move an upper end portion of thecover 114 downward. Thecover 114 at the opening position extends substantially horizontally in therearward direction 52 relative to theshaft 116. When thecover 114 is pivoted from the closing position toward the opening position, thecover 114 goes out of a range within which thecover sensor 115 can detect thecover 114. When thecover 114 is at the opening position, theopening 112 of thecase 101 is opened. In this state, the user can insert/remove theink cartridges 30 into/from the cartridge-attachment section 110. - As illustrated in
Fig. 1 , the cartridge-attachment section 110 also includes acontroller 117. As described earlier, thecontroller 117 is an arithmetic-logic unit including a CPU, a memory, and the like, for example. Thecontroller 117 may be configured as a controller of theprinter 10. Thecontroller 117 is configured to receive signals outputted from theoptical sensor 113 and thecover sensor 115. In response to receipt of a signal from thecover sensor 115 indicating that thecover 114 is at the closing position, thecontroller 117 is configured to determine a type of theink cartridge 30 inserted into theinsertion space 111 based on a signal outputted from theoptical sensor 113. Details of the detection performed by thecontroller 117 will be described later. - The
ink cartridge 30 is a container configured to store ink therein. Theink cartridges - Hereinafter, in order to describe a configuration common to all of the
ink cartridges 30, a structure of theink cartridge 30M will be first described as an illustrative example, with reference toFigs. 4 to 10 . Subsequently, a detailed structure of theink cartridge 30K, and differences among theink cartridges - The
ink cartridge 30 is inserted into and attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in a posture illustrated inFigs. 4 to 10 . This posture of theink cartridge 30 in the attached state (attached posture) will also be called an upright posture, hereinafter, whenever necessary. That is, the upright posture corresponds to the attached posture. In other words, theink cartridge 30 is in the upright posture when theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. In the upright posture or in the attached posture, the ink stored in thefirst ink chamber 32 of theink cartridge 30 can flow out therefrom to be supplied into the correspondingink needle 102 through theink supply port 71 of theink supply potion 34. That is, theink cartridge 30 can be used in theprinter 10 when in the attached posture or in the upright posture. - Specifically, as will be described later, the
ink cartridge 30 includes afront wall 40, arear wall 41, anupper wall 39, and abottom wall 42. When the ink cartridge 30(30M) is in the upright posture or in the attached posture illustrated inFigs. 4 to 10 , a direction from therear wall 41 toward thefront wall 40 coincides with thefrontward direction 51; a direction from thefront wall 40 toward therear wall 41 coincides with therearward direction 52; a direction from theupper wall 39 toward thebottom wall 42 coincides with thedownward direction 53, and a direction from thebottom wall 42 toward theupper wall 39 coincides with theupward direction 54. - In the upright posture of the
ink cartridge 30, thefront wall 40 faces frontward or is oriented in thefrontward direction 51; therear wall 41 is spaced away from thefront wall 40 in the front-rear direction; theupper wall 39 is positioned between thefront wall 40 and therear wall 41 in the front-rear direction; and thebottom wall 42 is spaced away from theupper wall 39 in the up-down direction. Thebottom wall 42 is positioned between thefront wall 40 and therear wall 41 in the front-rear direction. In other words, in the upright posture of theink cartridge 30, thefront wall 40 faces frontward, therear wall 41 faces rearward, thebottom wall 42 faces downward, and theupper wall 39 faces upward. - More specifically, when the
ink cartridge 30 is in the attached posture or in the upright posture, a front surface of thefront wall 40 constitutes an front surface of theink cartridge 30; a rear surface of therear wall 41 constitutes a rear surface of theink cartridge 30; an upper surface of theupper wall 39 constitutes an upper surface of theink cartridge 30; and a bottom surface of thebottom wall 42 constitutes a bottom surface of theink cartridge 30. That is, in the upright posture (attached posture) of theink cartridge 30, the front surface of thefront wall 40 faces frontward, the rear surface of therear wall 41 faces rearward, the bottom surface of thebottom wall 42 faces downward, and the upper surface of theupper wall 39 faces upward. - Hereinafter, for simplifying explanation, whenever necessary, the front surface of the
front wall 40 will be referred to as thefront surface 40; the rear surface of therear wall 41 will be simply to as therear surface 41; the upper surface of theupper wall 39 will be referred to as theupper surface 39; and the bottom surface of thebottom wall 42 will be referred to as thebottom surface 42. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 to 10 , the ink cartridge 30(30M) includes acartridge body 31 of a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Thecartridge body 31 in the upright posture has a generally flat shape having a height in the up-down direction (in the gravitational direction), a width in the left-right direction, and a depth in the front-rear direction, the width being smaller than the height and the depth. Thecartridge body 31 includes thefront wall 40, therear wall 41, theupper wall 39, thebottom wall 42 andside walls cartridge body 31 facing frontward during insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 (i.e., in a state where theink cartridge 30 is in the upright posture) is the front surface 40 (front surface of the front wall 40). A surface of thecartridge body 31 facing rearward during insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 (i.e., in a state where theink cartridge 30 is in the upright posture) is the rear surface 41 (the rear surface of the rear wall 41). Theside walls front wall 40 andrear wall 41 so as to connect thefront wall 40 and therear wall 41. In the upright posture of theink cartridge 30, outer surfaces of theside walls - More specifically, in the present embodiment, the
cartridge body 31 includes alower case 31L, and anupper cover 31U fitted to thelower case 31L. Within thelower case 31L, afirst ink chamber 32 and thesecond ink chamber 33 are formed (seeFig. 8 ). Thelower case 31L includes thebottom wall 42, and theupper cover 31U includes theupper wall 39. In thecartridge body 31, at least a portion of therear wall 41 constituting thelower case 31L is capable of transmitting light so that a liquid surface of the ink stored in thefirst ink chamber 32 andsecond ink chamber 33 can be viewed from outside. An upper surface of theupper cover 31U constitutes theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31. - As illustrated in
Figs. 7 and8 , therear surface 41 includes anupper portion 41U and alower portion 41L. Theupper portion 41U is positioned upward of thelower portion 41L. Thelower portion 41L is positioned forward of theupper portion 41U. Each of the upper andlower portions upper portion 41U andlower portion 41L cross each other but are not orthogonal to each other. Specifically, thelower portion 41L is inclined relative to the up-down direction so as to extend closer to thefront surface 40 toward thelower surface 42. In other words, in the present embodiment, theupper portion 41U constitutes a rearmost portion of therear surface 41 in therearward direction 52. Further, in the present embodiment, theupper portion 41U also constitutes a rearmost portion of theink cartridge 30. InFig. 10 , a rearmost point of theink cartridge 30 is illustrated as a point P5. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 and8 , thelower surface 42 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction. Specifically, assuming thelower surface 42 has afront end 42F and arear end 42R, thebottom surface 42 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction such that thefront end 42F is positioned downward relative to therear end 42R. Thefront end 42F of the lower surface 42 (inclined surface) is positioned frontward relative to theIC board 64, as will be described later. Therear end 42R of the lower surface 42 (inclined surface) is connected to a lower end of thelower portion 41L of therear surface 41. Preferably, thelower surface 42 is inclined relative to the horizontal direction at an angle of 2° to 4°. - As illustrated in
Figs. 6 and7 , thecartridge body 31 also includes asub-lower wall 48 and a connectingwall 49 that belong to thelower case 31L. Thesub-lower wall 48 is positioned upward of thelower wall 42. Thesub-lower wall 48 extends rearward from a lower end of thefront wall 40. In the present embodiment, a front end of thesub-lower wall 48 is positioned frontward of a front end of theink supply portion 34, and a rear end of thesub-lower wall 48 is positioned rearward of the front end of theink supply portion 34. The connectingwall 49 connects the lower wall 42 (lower surface 42) and thesub-lower wall 48. Theink supply portion 34 extends forward from the connectingwall 49 at a position downward of thesub-lower wall 48 and upward of thelower surface 42. Note that the front end of thesub-lower wall 48 may be arranged at an arbitrary position, for example, at a position rearward of the front end of theink supply portion 34. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 ,6-9A and10 , theupper wall 39 belonging to theupper cover 31U has a stepped upper surface. Specifically, the upper surface 39 (upper surface of the upper wall 39) includes a rearward portion that is raised upward relative to a frontward portion of theupper surface 39. Hereinafter, the rearward portion will be referred to as a raisedportion 39A, whenever necessary. - A
first protrusion 43 is provided on theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31. More specifically, thefirst protrusion 43 is disposed at the raisedportion 39A of theupper surface 39. Thefirst protrusion 43 extends in the front-rear direction and is positioned at a generally left-right center of the upper surface 39 (raisedportion 39A). Thefirst protrusion 43 has a rear end whose surface faces rearward. This surface serves as the lockingsurface 151. - The locking
surface 151 is a plane parallel to the gravitational direction (downward direction 53). That is, the lockingsurface 151 extends in the up-down direction and in the left-right direction. In the present embodiment, the lockingsurface 151 extends upward from the upper surface 39 (raisedportion 39A) of thecartridge body 31. In a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, the lockingsurface 151 facing rearward is in contact with thelock shaft 145 from frontward thereof in an engaging region E (illustrated inFig. 5A ). In other words, the lockingsurface 151 has the engaging region E configured to engage thelock shaft 145 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. The engaging region E is positioned upward relative to theIC board 64 in the attached posture. The contact (engagement) between the locking surface 151 (engaging region E) and thelock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction enables theink cartridge 30 to be held in the cartridge-attachment section 110 against the biasing force of acoil spring 78 of theink supply potion 34, as will be described later. Although thelocking surface 151 contacts thelock shaft 145 at the engaging region (surface contact) in the embodiment, the lockingsurface 151 may make contact with thelock shaft 145 at a specific point (point contact), as long as the lockingsurface 151 can receive the rearward urging force of thecoil spring 78 to maintain theink cartridge 30 in the attached state. As an example, the lockingsurface 151 may make contact with thelock shaft 145 on an engaging point P3 within the engaging region E (seeFig. 5A ). - The
first protrusion 43 also includes ahorizontal surface 154 and aninclined surface 155. Thehorizontal surface 154 extends frontward from anupper edge 151U of the lockingsurface 151. That is, thehorizontal surface 154 is provided frontward of the lockingsurface 151. Thehorizontal surface 154 is a surface extending in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction. Thehorizontal surface 154 is a surface that is positioned farthest away from theupper surface 39 among surfaces constituting thefirst protrusion 43. Thehorizontal surface 154 has a left-right dimension that is smaller than a front-rear dimension thereof. Theinclined surface 155 extends frontward and downward from a front edge of thehorizontal surface 154. That is, the front edge of thehorizontal surface 154 is the rear edge of the inclined surface 155 (denoted as a point P1 inFigs. 7 ,8 ,9A and10 ). Theinclined surface 155 is disposed frontward relative to thehorizontal surface 154. Theinclined surface 155 is a surface facing upward and forward. Preferably, theinclined surface 155 is included relative to the horizontal direction at an angle of 15° to 25°. Put another way, the lockingsurface 151 and theinclined surface 155 are connected to each other via thehorizontal surface 154. Thus, a boundary edge between the lockingsurface 151 andinclined surface 155 does not constitute a ridge-like shape. Theinclined surface 155 is positioned between theIC board 64 and the lockingsurface 151 in the front-rear direction. During insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110, thelock shaft 145 is smoothly guided toward the rear beyond the lockingsurface 151 while abutting against and sliding along theinclined surface 155 andhorizontal surface 154. - Further, the cartridge body 31 (
upper cover 31U) also includes a pair of sub-upper walls 91 extending in the front-rear direction. One of the sub-upper walls 91 is located frontward of the upper wall 39 (to be referred to as a frontsub-upper wall 91F), while the other sub-upper wall 91 is located rearward of the upper wall 39 (to be referred to as a rearsub-upper wall 91R). The frontsub-upper wall 91F has a front end connected to an upper end of thefront wall 40, and a rear end connected to a front end of theupper wall 39 via a connectingwall 95 extending in the up-down direction. The rearsub-upper wall 91R has a rear end connected to an upper end of therear wall 41. The front and rearsub-upper walls upper surface 39 in the front-rear direction. - An
operation portion 90 is also provided on the upper surface 39 (raisedportion 39A) of thecartridge body 31 at a position rearward of the lockingsurface 151. Theoperation portion 90 is disposed upward relative to the rearsub-upper wall 91R (upper surface of the rearsub-upper wall 91R) and is spaced apart therefrom in the front-rear direction. Theoperation portion 90 has a generally flat plate-like shape. Specifically, theoperation portion 90 protrudes upward from the raisedportion 39A of theupper surface 39, and is then bent obliquely rearward and downward. Theoperation portion 90 protrudes upward from the raisedportion 39A of theupper surface 39 up to the same degree as thefirst protrusion 43 protrudes from the raisedportion 39A in the up-down direction. Here, "the same degree" means that an upper edge of theoperation portion 90 is positioned higher by 0 to 1 mm, or lower by 0 to 1 mm, relative to the upper edge of the first protrusion 43 (i.e., relative to the horizontal surface 154). Theoperation portion 90 is connected to alower edge 151L of the lockingsurface 151 via asurface 156 constituting part of the upper surface 39 (or, part of the raisedportion 39A). Arib 94 is provided between theoperation portion 90 and the rearsub-upper wall 91F. Therib 94 connects theoperation portion 90 and the rearsub-upper wall 91R in the up-down direction and extends in the front-rear direction. Therib 94 has a dimension in the left-right direction that is smaller than each of a dimension of theoperation portion 90 and a dimension of the rearsub-upper wall 91R in the left-right direction. - The
operation portion 90 has a surface that faces diagonally upward and rearward. This surface serves as anoperation surface 92. Theoperation surface 92 and the rearsub-upper wall 91R are aligned with each other at least partially in the up-down direction. In other words, when theink cartridge 30 is viewed from above, theoperation surface 92 and the rearsub-upper wall 91R overlap with each other. On theoperation surface 92, a plurality of projections, e.g., a plurality ofridges 93 extending in the left-right direction is formed to be spaced apart from one another in the front-rear direction. These ridges 93 (as the plurality of projections) allow the user to easily visually recognize theoperation surface 92. Theridges 93 can also serve to prevent the user's finger from slipping over theoperation surface 92 when he or she operates theoperation surface 92. - The
operation surface 92 is visible when theink cartridge 30 is viewed from rearward and from upward. The user operates theoperation surface 92 in order to remove theink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 therefrom. Theoperation portion 90 is fixed to thecartridge body 31 so as not to move relative to thecartridge body 31. For example, theoperation portion 90 may be formed integrally with thecartridge body 31 so as not to pivot relative to thecartridge body 31. Thus, a force applied from the user to theoperation surface 92 is directly transmitted to thecartridge body 31 without changing a direction of the force. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 ,6-8 ,9A and10 , asecond protrusion 83 is also provided at the upper surface 39 (raisedportion 39A) of thecartridge body 31 at a position forward of thefirst protrusion 43. Thesecond protrusion 83 is provided at theupper cover 31U. Thesecond protrusion 83 extends forward from the front end of thefirst protrusion 43. That is, thesecond protrusion 83 and thefirst protrusion 43 are connected to each other. Thesecond protrusion 83 is formed at the same left-right position as thefirst protrusion 43. Thesecond protrusion 83 supports theIC board 64. Thesecond protrusion 83 has a rear end portion whose upper surface serves as thecontact surface 84. Put another way, thecontact surface 84 is connected to a lower end (front end) of theinclined surface 155 and extends frontward therefrom. Thecontact surface 84 faces upward (i.e., a flat upper surface). That is, thecontact surface 84 is positioned between theIC board 64 and the lockingsurface 151 in the front-rear direction. In a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, thecontact surface 84 is in contact with thepositioning portion 107 of the cartridge-attachment section 110, thereby providing positioning of theink cartridge 30 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 with respect to the up-down direction. Thecontact surface 84 is a surface that is not movable relative to theIC board 64. In the present embodiment, thecontact surface 84 is made of the same material as a member that supports theIC board 64, i.e., theupper cover 31U. Theinclined surface 155 may have an arbitrary configuration. For example, a continuous surface need not be formed between thecontact surface 84 and the lockingsurface 151. Alternatively, for example, thesecond protrusion 83 having thecontact surface 84 and thefirst protrusion 43 having the lockingsurface 151 may not be formed to be continuous with each other. That is, thesecond protrusion 83 and thefirst protrusion 43 may be provided separately on theupper surface 39 so as to protrude upward therefrom. - Note that, the front surface, rear surface, top surface, bottom surface, and side surfaces constituting the
ink cartridge 30 need not be configured as one flat plane, respectively. That is, the front surface of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when theink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from its front side, and that is(are) positioned frontward relative to a front-rear center of theink cartridge 30. In the present embodiment, the front surface 40 (i.e., the front surface of thefront wall 40 connecting thesub-lower wall 48 and frontsub-upper wall 91F) and a front surface of the connectingwall 49 connecting thesub-lower wall 48 and the bottom wall 42 (bottom surface 42) constitute the front surface of theink cartridge 30. Also, the connectingwall 95 connecting the frontsub-upper wall 91F and theupper wall 39 also constitutes the front surface of theink cartridges 30. On the other hand, theink cartridge 30 may not have thesub-lower wall 48 and the frontsub-upper wall 91F. In other words, thefront surface 40 of theink cartridge 30 may be configured as one surface continuously connecting theupper surface 39 and thelower surface 42. - Likewise, the rear surface of the
ink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when theink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from its rear side, and that is(are) positioned rearward relative to the front-rear center of theink cartridge 30. The upper surface of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when theink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from above, and that is(are) positioned upward relative to a center of theink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction. The lower surface of theink cartridge 30 can be any surface(s) that can be seen when theink cartridge 30 in its upright posture is viewed from below, and that is(are) positioned downward relative to the center of theink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction. The same is applied to the side surfaces of theink cartridge 30. - As illustrated in
Figs. 4 ,6-8 ,9A and10 , the light-blockingplate 67 is also provided at the upper surface 39 (upper surface of the upper wall 39). Specifically, the light-blockingplate 67 protrudes upward from theupper surface 39 at a position frontward relative to the raisedportion 39A. In the present embodiment, the light-blockingplate 67 is integrally formed with theupper cover 31U. The light-blockingplate 67 extends in the front-rear direction. The light-blockingplate 67 is positioned frontward relative to thesecond protrusion 83. The light-blockingplate 67 is connected to the raisedportion 39A that supports thesecond protrusion 83 on which theIC board 64 is disposed. In other words, the raisedportion 39A, which constitutes a part of theupper surface 39, also serves as a supporting portion that supports theIC board 64. - The light-blocking
plate 67 is also positioned frontward and downward relative to theIC board 64. In the present embodiment, the light-blockingplate 67 is a plate made of resin containing a colored material capable of absorbing light (carbon black pigment, for example). Alternatively, the light-blockingplate 67 may be configured by attaching a material that cannot transmit light, such as aluminum, to a side surface of a plate capable of transmitting light. - The light-blocking
plate 67 has a flat plate-like shape whose left-right dimension (the width W1 illustrated inFig. 14 ) is smaller than a front-rear dimension thereof. The light-blockingplate 67 has afront surface 67b, left and right side surfaces 67a, an upper surface 67c, and a sloped surface 67d. - The
front surface 67b of the light-blockingplate 67 is a surface facing frontward in the upright posture of theink cartridge 30. Thefront surface 67b serves as an interferingsurface 67b of theink cartridge 30. That is, the interferingsurface 67b faces frontward in the upright posture of theink cartridge 30. The interferingsurface 67b extends upward from theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31. Put another way, the interferingsurface 67b is a plane extending upward from theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31. The interferingsurface 67b is a flat plane extending in the up-down direction and in the left-right direction. The interfering surface 67bM of theink cartridge 30M is configured to abut against any one of thegates 108 other than thecorresponding gate 108M when theink cartridge 30M is inserted into any one of theinsertion spaces 111 different from the specifiedinsertion space 111M. That is, the interfering surface 67bM of theink cartridge 30M is designed to abut against thegate 108C, or thegate 108Y, or thegate 108K, in case that theink cartridge 30M is inserted into theinsertion space 111C, or theinsertion space 111Y, or theinsertion space 111K. More specifically, the interfering surface 67bM of theink cartridge 30M is designed to abut against any one of thegate 108C, thegate 108Y and thegate 108K, during insertion of theink cartridge 30M into any one of theinsertion space 111C, theinsertion space 111Y, and theinsertion space 111K other than theinsertion space 111M, i.e., in a process of insertion of theink cartridge 30M until theink cartridge 30M is completely attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 to be at the attached posture. - The both side surfaces 67a of the light-blocking
plate 67 are positioned rearward of the interferingsurface 67b. The both side surfaces 67a facing rightward and leftward, respectively, serve as light-blocking surfaces 67a of the light-blockingplate 67. The sloped surface 67d is a sloped surface that connects a front edge of the upper surface 67c and an upper edge of the interferingsurface 67b. The sloped surface 67d faces forward and upward. The rear edge of the sloped surface 67d, i.e., the front edge of the upper surface 67c (denoted as a point P2 inFigs. 7 ,8 ,9A ,10 ) is the highest portion in the light-blockingplate 67. The upper edge of the interferingsurface 67b is positioned slightly downward relative to the upper surface (horizontal surface 154 and inclined surface 155) of thefirst protrusion 43. The interferingsurface 67b is positioned forward and downward of theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64. - As illustrated in
Figs. 6 and9A , the both side surfaces 67a (light-blocking surfaces 67a) of the light-blockingplate 67 extend rearward from left and right ends of the interferingsurface 67b (also see Fig. and 12). That is, the interferingsurface 67b and each side surface 67a are aligned with each other in the front-rear direction. Further, referring toFig. 8 , the interferingsurface 67b is positioned rearward relative to aninner surface 40R (rear surface) of thefront wall 40, theinner surface 40R defining a front edge of thefirst ink chamber 32, as will be described later. - The light-blocking
plate 67 is configured to block the light of theoptical sensor 113 traveling in the left-right direction from the light-emitting portion to the light-receiving portion. More specifically, when the light emitted from the light-emitting portion of theoptical sensor 113 is incident on the right or left side surface 67a of the light-blockingplate 67 before arriving at the light-receiving portion, the intensity of light received at the light-receiving portion is less than a predetermined intensity, for example, zero. Note that the light-blockingplate 67 may completely block the light traveling in the left-right direction, or may partially attenuate the light, may refract the light to change a traveling direction thereof, or may fully reflect the light. - As illustrated in
Figs. 6-9A and10 , the light-blocking plate 67(67M) is formed with the cutout 66(66M). Thecutout 66 is configured to allow light to pass therethrough in the left-right direction (light-transmission portion). Thecutout 66 is a space provided by cutting out a portion of an upper end portion of the light-blockingplate 67. In other words, thecutout 66 is recessed downward from the upper surface 67c of the light-blockingplate 67. Thecutout 66 extends in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction. Thecutout 66 is formed at a position coincident with the correspondingoptical sensor 113 in the left-right direction when theink cartridge 30 having the light-blockingplate 67 provided with thecutout 66 is mounted in thecorresponding insertion space 111. In other words, in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, thecutout 66 of the light-blockingplate 67 of the attachedink cartridge 30 is located between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of the correspondingoptical sensor 113. Hence, the light from the light-emitting portion of the correspondingoptical sensor 113 is not blocked by thecutout 66, and is received at the light-receiving portion. - Note that, the light-blocking
plate 67 of the present embodiment is provided with thecutout 66 as the light-transmission portion. However, the light-transmission portion of the light-blockingplate 67 may not necessarily be provided as a cutout, as long as light from the light-emitting portion of theoptical sensor 113 can pass through the light-transmission portion. For example, the light-transmission portion may be provided as a through-hole penetrating a portion of the light-blockingplate 67 in the left-right direction, or as a transparent plate provided in the light-blockingplate 67. - More precisely, in the present embodiment, a portion of each side surface 67a enclosed by a broken line D in
Fig. 9A serves as a light -blocking portion of the light-blockingplate 67. That is, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion of the correspondingoptical sensor 113 is configured to be incident on this portion D of one of the light-blocking surfaces 67a during insertion of theink cartridge 30. This portion D can block or attenuate the incident light from theoptical sensor 113 during insertion of theink cartridge 30 and is therefore configured to be detected by thecontroller 117 through theoptical sensor 113. This portion D may serve as a detection surface D of the light-blockingplate 67. This detection surface D has a rear edge Dr that also constitutes a front edge of the cutout 66 (light-transmission portion). In the attached state of theink cartridge 30, theoptical sensor 113 is positioned to oppose thecutout 66. This means that, in the light-blocking surface 67a, the light from theoptical sensor 113 is incident on the detection surface D but cannot be incident on a portion positioned rearward of thecutout 66. - The light-blocking
plate 67 may not be formed with thecutout 66. For example, the light-blockingplate 67 of theink cartridge 30C depicted inFig. 17 is not formed with thecutout 66. In case that thecutout 66 is not formed in the light-blockingplate 67, one of the side surfaces 67a of the light-blockingplate 67 opposes the light-emitting portion of theoptical sensor 113 in the left-right direction when theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. Thus, the light emitted from the light-emitting portion of theoptical sensor 113 is blocked by the light-blockingplate 67 and is not received at the light-receiving portion. - The
ink cartridges 30 may or may not include thecutout 66 depending on types of theink cartridges 30. For example, the types of theink cartridges 30 may vary depending on colors of ink, initial amounts of ink (larger or smaller), or types of ink (pigment ink or dye ink) stored in theink cartridges 30. In the present embodiment, theink cartridges 30 are, for each color, configured to store different initial amounts of ink. Specifically, theink cartridges 30M storing magenta ink can be classified into two types: larger-amount type and smaller-amount type. Theink cartridge 30M of the larger-amount type stores a larger amount of ink in thefirst ink chamber 32 as its initial amount of ink than the initial amount of ink stored in thefirst ink chamber 32 of theink cartridge 30M of the smaller-amount type. In this example, theink cartridge 30M of the larger-amount type includes the light-blockingplate 67M formed with thecutout 66M, while theink cartridge 30M of the smaller amount type includes the light-blockingplate 67M without thecutout 66M. In the present embodiment, the type of the ink cartridge 30 (i.e., the initial amount of ink) attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 can be determined based on presence or absence of thecutout 66 in the light-blockingplate 67, as will be described later in detail. - As illustrated in
Figs. 6 to 8 , theIC board 64 is disposed at the upper end of thesecond protrusion 83 and between the light-blockingplate 67 and thefirst protrusion 43. TheIC board 64 is positioned in a recess that is recessed downward and that is formed in thesecond protrusion 83, the recess being positioned frontward of thecontact surface 84. TheIC board 64 is supported by thesecond protrusion 83 from below. Specifically, although not depicted in detail in the drawings, a photocurable resin is filled in the recess of thesecond protrusion 83, whereby theIC board 64 is adhered to thesecond protrusion 83. - The
IC board 64 includes a substrate, an IC (not illustrated), and fourelectrodes 65 mounted on an upper surface of the substrate, for example. The substrate is made of silicon, for example. The IC is a semiconductor integrated circuit and readably stores data indicating information relating to theink cartridge 30, such as a lot number, a manufacturing date, and a color of the ink. Alternatively, theIC board 64 may be formed of a flexible board (substrate) having flexibility, provided with the IC and electrodes. - The
electrodes 65 are electrically connected to the IC. The fourelectrodes 65 each extend in the front-rear direction. The fourelectrodes 65 are arranged spaced apart from one another in the left-right direction. The fourelectrodes 65 are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate such that theelectrodes 65 are exposed above to allow electrically access thereto from above. Theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 come into contact with the correspondingcontacts 106 each at a contact point P4 (illustrated inFig. 10 ) to be electrically connected thereto during insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110, and is electrically connected to the corresponding set ofcontacts 106 in a state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. - As illustrated in
Fig. 9A and10 , theIC board 64 is arranged rearward relative to theink supply port 71 of theink supply potion 34. TheIC board 64 is disposed forward of the lockingsurface 151. TheIC board 64 is also positioned downward of theupper edge 151U of the lockingsurface 151, but upward relative to the light-blockingplate 67. Further, as illustrated inFig. 4 , theIC board 64 is positioned rearward relative to thedistal end 102E of theink needle 102 in thefrontward direction 51 in the attached posture. - As described above, the connecting
wall 95 connects the frontsub-upper wall 91F and theupper wall 39. That is, the connectingwall 95 extends upward from the rear end of the frontsub-upper wall 91F. The connectingwall 95 faces forward. Theair communication port 96 is formed in the connectingwall 95. That is, theair communication port 96 is disposed upward relative to a center of the dimension of thecartridge body 31 in the up-down direction. Theair communication port 96 is a through-hole formed in the connectingwall 95. Theair communication port 96 has a substantially circular cross-section (seeFig. 6 ) and has an inner diameter larger than an outer diameter of thecorresponding rod 125 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. Therod 125 is configured to enter theair communication port 96 during insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110. - As illustrated in
Fig. 8 , thefirst ink chamber 32, thesecond ink chamber 33, theink valve chamber 35, and anair valve chamber 36 are provided inside thecartridge body 31. - The
first ink chamber 32 and theair valve chamber 36 are partitioned by apartitioning wall 44. Thefirst ink chamber 32 and thesecond ink chamber 33 are partitioned by apartitioning wall 45. Thepartitioning wall 44 andpartitioning wall 45 are both walls extending in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction. Thepartitioning wall 44 andpartitioning wall 45 are disposed opposite to each other in the up-down direction. A through-hole 46 is formed in thepartitioning wall 44. Thefirst ink chamber 32 and theair valve chamber 36 communicate with each other through the through-hole 46. - As illustrated in
Fig. 8 , specifically, thefirst ink chamber 32 is a space enclosed by the following surfaces: alower surface 44L of thepartitioning wall 44, anupper surface 45U of thepartitioning wall 45, and theinner surface 40R of thefront wall 40, aninner surface 41F of the rear wall 41 (front surface of the rear wall 41), and inner surfaces of theside walls lower surface 44L andupper surface 45U defines upper and lower edges of thefirst ink chamber 32, respectively. Theinner surface 40R,inner surface 41F, and the inner surfaces of theside walls first ink chamber 32, respectively. Theinner surface 40R is the rear surface of thefront wall 40, i.e., a surface opposite to the front surface 40 (front surface of the front wall 40). Theinner surface 41F is a front surface of therear wall 41, i.e., a surface opposite to the rear surface 41 (rear surface of the rear wall 41). The inner surfaces of theside walls side walls Fig. 7 , the inner surface of theside wall 38 is not illustrated. - The
second ink chamber 33 is positioned downward of thefirst ink chamber 32 in the upright posture of theink cartridge 30. Thesecond ink chamber 33 can store ink therein. Thesecond ink chamber 33 has a capacity smaller than a capacity of thefirst ink chamber 32. That is, a smaller amount of ink can be stored in thesecond ink chamber 33 than in thefirst ink chamber 32. - The
second ink chamber 33 andink valve chamber 35 are partitioned by apartitioning wall 50. Thesecond ink chamber 33 communicates with thefirst ink chamber 32 through acommunication port 47 formed in the partitioning wall 45 (seeFig. 8 ). Thesecond ink chamber 33 communicates with theink valve chamber 35 through a through-hole 99 formed in thepartitioning wall 50. Thepartitioning wall 50 defines a rear edge of theink valve chamber 35, i.e., arear edge 75R of the ink supply potion 34 (seeFig. 8 ). - The
second ink chamber 33 is a space enclosed by the following surfaces: alower surface 45L of thepartitioning wall 45, an upper surface 42U of thelower wall 42, a rear surface 50R of thepartitioning wall 50, theinner surface 41F of therear wall 41, and the inner surfaces of theside walls lower surface 45L and upper surface 42U define upper and lower edges of thesecond ink chamber 33, respectively. The rear surface 50R,inner surface 41F and the inner surfaces of theside walls second ink chamber 33, respectively. - Within the
air valve chamber 36, avalve 97 and thecoil spring 98 are disposed. Theair valve chamber 36 can communicate with ambient air through theair communication port 96 formed in the connectingwall 95. Thevalve 97 is movable between a closing position sealing theair communication port 96 and an opening position separated from theair communication port 96. Thecoil spring 98 is disposed rearward of thevalve 97 so as to be capable of expanding and contracting in the front-rear direction. Thecoil spring 98 urges thevalve 97 in the frontward direction 51 (toward the air communication port 96). Accordingly, in a state that no external force is applied, thevalve 97 is in contact with theair communication port 96 to seal theair communication port 96. Thecoil spring 98 has a spring constant that is smaller than a spring constant of thecoil spring 78 of theink supply portion 34. - Incidentally, a member for sealing the
air communication port 96 is not limited to thevalve 97. For example, a seal may be removably affixed to the connectingwall 95 to seal theair communication port 96. - During insertion of the
ink cartridges 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110, therod 125 of the cartridge-attachment section 110 enters inside theair communication port 96, thereby moving thevalve 97 rearward from the closing position toward the opening position against the biasing force of thecoil spring 98. When thevalve 97 is separated from theair communication port 96 by therod 125 and is at the separating position, thefirst ink chamber 32 is opened to the atmosphere. - The
ink supply portion 34 is provided at the connectingwall 49 constituting the front surface of theink cartridge 30. Theink supply potion 34 has a cylindrical outer shape. More specifically, theink supply portion 34 includes a hollow cylindrical-shapedcylinder 75, and a packing 76. Thecylinder 75 protrudes forward from the connectingwall 49. Thecylinder 75 has a front end that is opened to the outside of theink cartridge 30. Thecylinder 75 defines an inner space therein that serves as theink valve chamber 35. - The packing 76 is provided at the open front end of the
cylinder 75. The packing 76 is a disk-shaped member and has a center portion formed with a through-hole. The packing 76 is made of an elastic material such as rubber or elastomer. The through-hole penetrates through the center portion of the packing 76 in the front-rear direction to provide a tubular-shaped inner peripheral surface that defines theink supply port 71. Theink supply port 71 has a diameter that is slightly smaller than an outer diameter of theink needle 102. - Within the
ink valve chamber 35, avalve 77 and thecoil spring 78 are disposed. Thevalve 77 is movable in the front-rear direction to open and close theink supply port 71 penetrating the center portion of the packing 76. Thecoil spring 78 biases thevalve 77 forward. Accordingly, without application of an external force, thevalve 77 closes theink supply port 71 of the packing 76. - When the
ink cartridge 30 is inserted into the cartridge-attachment section 110 in a state where thevalve 77 closes theink supply port 71, theink needle 102 enters theink supply port 71. An outer peripheral surface of theink needle 102 entering into theink supply port 71 is brought into contact with the inner peripheral surface defining theink supply port 71 to provide liquid-tight seal therewith, while elastically deforming the packing 76. When thedistal end 102E of theink needle 102 passes through theink supply port 71 of the packing 76 and enters inside theink valve chamber 35, thedistal end 102E of theink needle 102 comes in contact with thevalve 77. As theink cartridge 30 is further inserted into the cartridge-attachment section 110, thedistal end 102E of theink needle 102 moves thevalve 77 rearward against the biasing force of thecoil spring 78, thereby separating thevalve 77 from theink supply port 71 to open theink supply port 71. Accordingly, the ink in thevalve chamber 35 is allowed to flow into the inner space of theink needle 102. - Note that, instead of the
valve 77, theink supply portion 34 may be closed with a film. In this case, theink supply port 71 may be defined by the front end of thecylinder 75, not by the packing 76. Alternatively, theink supply port 71 may be configured to be closed by a sealing member without a through-hole. In this case, theink supply port 71 may be formed by piercing theink needle 102 into the sealing member, and be closed by an elasticity of the sealing member itself as theink needle 102 is removed from the sealing member. Still alternatively, theink supply portion 34 need not be provided as a cylindrical-shaped member. For example, a through-hole may be formed in thefront wall 40 to penetrate the same in a thickness direction thereof (front-rear direction). The ink supply potion is partially defined by thefront wall 40. - Referring to
Fig. 9A , here, assume an imaginary plane X1 that includes the point P1 and the point P2 and that extends in the left-right direction. As explained above, the point P1 denotes the boundary edge at which theinclined surface 155 and thehorizontal surface 154 are connected to each other; and the point P2 denotes the front edge of the upper surface 67c of the light-blockingplate 67. In the present embodiment, the imaginary plane X1 is inclined to extend downward toward frontward. TheIC board 64 is disposed below the imaginary plane X1. - More specifically, assume a region that is defined between the imaginary plane X1 and the
upper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31, i.e., a space that is above theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31 and below the imaginary plane X1. TheIC board 64 is disposed within this region. Further, the side surfaces 67a of the light-blockingplate 67, thecutout 66, theIC board 64, thecontact surface 84, and theinclined surface 155 are all disposed between the point P1 and the point P2 in the front-rear direction within the region defined between theupper surface 39 and the imaginary plane X1 in the up-down direction. In other words, members that can be accessed from above or the left or the right side of theink cartridge 30 are all disposed within this region. Put another way, in theink cartridge 30 of the present embodiment, there is no member that extends to cross the imaginary plane X1 between the point P1 and the point P2. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface 155 (point P1) is the highest point, and the front edge of the upper surface 67c of the light-blocking plate 67 (point P2) is the second highest point among all the members positioned between the point P1 and point P2 on theupper surface 39 of theink cartridge 30. - In the
frontward direction 51, the lockingsurface 151,IC board 64 and light-blockingplate 67 are arranged in this order, from therear surface 41 toward thefront surface 40. In the up-down direction, the light-blockingplate 67,IC board 64 and the lockingsurface 151 are arranged in this order toward the top. More specifically, uppermost portions of the light-blockingplate 67, theIC board 64 and the lockingsurface 151 are arranged toward the top in the recited order in theupward direction 54. - Further, as illustrated in
Fig. 14 , thefirst protrusion 43 has a dimension or width in the left-right direction (width W3) that is greater than the width W1 of the light-blockingplate 67 in the left-right direction. That is, thefirst protrusion 43 has a wider width (W3) than the light-blockingplate 67 and protrudes from theupper surface 39 further upward relative to the light-blockingplate 67. Thefirst protrusion 43 is designed to protect the light-blockingplate 67 from external damages, such as impacts that may be impinged at the time of falling of theink cartridge 30 onto the floor, for example. - Further, referring to
Fig. 8 , the light-blockingplate 67 is positioned frontward relative to a center of gravity G of theink cartridges 30 in the front-rear direction, whereas the lockingsurface 151 is positioned rearward relative to the center of gravity G of theink cartridges 30 in the front-rear direction. In other words, the light-blockingplate 67 is positioned closer to thefront surface 40 than the center of gravity G is to thefront surface 40 in the front-rear direction. The lockingsurface 151 is positioned closer to therear surface 41 than the center of gravity G is to therear surface 41 in the front-rear direction. - Referring to
Fig. 10 in which theink cartridge 30 is in the attached posture or in the upright posture, theIC board 64 is positioned rearward relative to theink supply port 71 of theink supply potion 34 in the front-rear direction. Further, theIC board 64 is positioned rearward relative to thepartitioning wall 50 defining therear edge 75R of theink supply potion 34 in the front-rear direction. Thecontact surface 84 is also positioned rearward relative to theink supply port 71 of theink supply potion 34. TheIC board 64, thecontact surface 84 and theinclined surface 155 are aligned in the front-rear direction in this order from the front toward the rear. More specifically, referring toFigs. 9B and13A to 13D , assume an imaginary plane X2 passing through the left-right center of theIC board 64 and extending parallel to the front-rear direction and up-down direction. In the present embodiment, this imaginary plane X2 also passes through centers of thecontact surface 84, theinclined surface 155 and the lockingsurface 151 in the left-right direction. Further, in the present embodiment, the imaginary plane X2 also passes the left-right center of theink supply port 71. - Again, on the
upper surface 39 between theIC board 64 and theinclined surface 155 in the front-rear direction, the upper edge of the inclined surface 155 (point PI) is the uppermost position. Thecontact surface 84 is positioned slightly higher relative to theelectrodes 65 on theIC board 64, but is positioned lower than the upper edge (point PI) of theinclined surface 155. Thecontact surface 84 is positioned at the substantially same level as or slightly lower relative to the lower edge of theinclined surface 155. - The
ink supply potion 34, theIC board 64 and the lockingsurface 151 are aligned in the front-rear direction in this order from the front toward the rear. More specifically, referring toFigs. 8 and10 , theIC board 64 is arranged rearward relative to the ink supply potion 34 (ink supply port 71) in the front-rear direction. Further, theIC board 64 andcontact surface 84 are aligned with each other in the front-rear direction. - The light-blocking
plate 67 is positioned between theink supply port 71 of theink supply potion 34 and theIC board 64 in the front-rear direction. The light-blockingplate 67 is also positioned lower than the upper surface of theIC board 64, i.e., theelectrodes 65. Thefront end 42F of thebottom surface 42 is positioned frontward relative to theIC board 64. -
Fig. 10 summarizes positional relationships among the above-mentioned elements of theink cartridge 30. - A distance D1 is larger than a distance D2 (D1 > D2). Here, the distance D1 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the ink supply port 71 (i.e., the front end face of the
ink supply potion 34 in which theink supply port 71 is open) and the engaging point P3 on the lockingsurface 151. The distance D2 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the engaging point P3 on the lockingsurface 151 and theupper portion 41U of the rear surface 41 (rearmost point P5 on the rear surface 41). Further, the distance D2 is shorter than a distance D5 (D2 < D5). The distance D5 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the contact point P4 on theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 and the engaging point P3 on the lockingsurface 151. The distance D5 is greater than a distance D6 (D5 > D6). The distance D6 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the contact point P4 on theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 and the front-rear center of thecontact surface 84. - Further, a distance D3 is longer than a distance D4 (D3 > D4). The distance D3 is defined as a distance in the up-down direction between the vertical center of the
ink supply port 71 and theupper edge 151U of the lockingsurface 151. The distance D4 is defined as a distance in the up-down direction between the vertical center of theink supply port 71 and thecontact surface 84. Still further, the distance D4 is shorter than a distance D7 (D4 < D7), where the distance D7 is defined as a distance in the up-down direction between the vertical center of theink supply port 71 and theupper end 151U of theinclined surface 155. The contact point P4 on theelectrodes 65 is spaced away from the ink supply port 71 (front end face of theink supply potion 34 in which theink supply port 71 is open) by a distance D8. That is, the distance D8 is defined as a distance in the front-rear direction between the ink supply port 71 (front end face of theink supply potion 34 in which theink supply port 71 is open) and the contact point P4 on theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64. - Preferably, the distance D1 may range from 90 mm to 95 mm; the distance D2 may range from 20 mm to 25 mm; the distance D3 may range from 71 mm to 80 mm; the distance D4 may range from 70 mm to 73 mm; the distance D5 may range from 30 mm to 35 mm; and the distance D6 may range from 10 mm to 13 mm. These numerals are just examples, and should not be limited thereto.
- Note that, in the present embodiment, among the light-blocking
plate 67, theIC board 64 and the lockingsurface 151, the light-blockingplate 67 is positioned closest to the front surface 40 (front surface of the front wall 40) that defines a frontmost edge of theink cartridge 30. That is, the light-blockingplate 67 is the element that is positioned closest to the frontmost edge of theink cartridge 30 among those elements that are configured to be accessed from outside (i.e., among the light-blockingplate 67, theIC board 64 and the locking surface 151). Accordingly, the distance D2 between the rearmost point P5 and the engaging point P3 in the front-rear direction is shorter than a distance D9 defined between the frontmost edge (front surface of the front wall 40) and the front edge of the light-blocking plate 67 (i.e., the interferingsurface 67b) in the front-rear direction. - The
ink cartridge 30K is different from theink cartridges first ink chamber 32. - The
ink cartridge 30K stores ink of a black color. Theink cartridge 30K is different from theink cartridges cartridge body 31 of theink cartridge 30K has a left-right dimension that is larger than a left-right dimension of thecartridge body 31 of theink cartridges Figs. 11A through 15 . Accordingly, the capacity of thefirst ink chamber 32 of theink cartridge 30K is larger than those of theink cartridges - Referring to
Figs. 13A to 13D , theside surface 37 of theink cartridge 30K (labelled as 37K inFig. 13A ) is positioned farther away from the imaginary plane X2 than theside surface 37 of each of theink cartridges rightward direction 55. The left-right dimension of theink cartridge 30K is defined as a distance between outer edges of thecartridge body 31 of theink cartridge 30K in the left-right direction (i.e., the distance between theside surface 37K and theside surface 38 of thecartridge body 31 of the ink cartridge 3 0K). - Further, referring to
Figs. 13A to 13D , thefirst protrusion 43 andsecond protrusion 83 for theink cartridges upper surface 39 at the left-right center thereof. On the other hand, on theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31 of theink cartridge 30K, thefirst protrusion 43 andsecond protrusion 83 are arranged offset from the left-right center of theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31. More specifically, in the present embodiment, thefirst protrusion 43 andsecond protrusion 83 of theink cartridge 30K are disposed on theupper surface 39 at a position offset to the left relative to the left-right center of theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31. On the other hand, thefirst protrusion 43 andsecond protrusion 83 for theink cartridges upper surface 39 at the left-right center thereof. - The
ink cartridges plate 67. That is, specific positions of the respective light-blockingplates ink cartridges Figs. 13A to 13D . - Referring to
Figs. 13A and14 , with regard toink cartridge 30K, the left-right position of the light-blockingplate 67K does not fall within the width of theIC board 64 in left-right direction. That is, the light-blockingplate 67K of theink cartridge 30K is not aligned with the IC board 64 (thesecond protrusion 83 and the first protrusion 43) in the front-rear direction. - More specifically, as illustrated in
Fig. 14 , in theink cartridge 30K, the width W1 of the light-blockingplate 67K is smaller than a width W2 (W1 < W2), where the width W2 is a defined as a distance (dimension) in the left-right direction between the right edge of the upper surface 39 (right side surface 37K) and the right edge of the interferingsurface 67b (i.e., the right side surface 67a of the light-blockingplate 67K) in theink cartridge 30K. Put another way, the width W2 is a shortest distance in the left-right direction between one of the outer edges of the upper surface 39 (right edge of the upper surface 39) and one of the light-blocking surface 67a of the light-blockingplate 67K (or, one of the outer edges of the interferingsurface 67b) in theink cartridge 30K. Note that, in theink cartridge 30K, the right edge of the upper surface 39 (right side surface 37K) is closer to the right side surface 67a of the light-blockingplate 67K (right edge of the interferingsurface 67b) than the left edge of the upper surface 39 (left side surface 38) is to the right side surface 67a of the light-blockingplate 67K in the left-right direction. - Further, referring to
Fig. 14 , assume an imaginary plane X3 that represents an outermost edge of thecartridge body 31 of theink cartridge 30M(30C, 30Y) in the left-right direction. That is, the imaginary plane X3 corresponds to theside surface 37 of theink cartridge 30M (30C, 30Y) in the present embodiment. The light-blockingplate 67K of theink cartridge 30K is positioned outward relative to the imaginary plane X3 in the left-right direction, i.e., opposite to the imaginary plane X2 with respect to the imaginary plane X3. Put another way, in the left-right direction, a distance L1 is greater than a distance L2 (L1 > L2), where the distance L1 is a distance between the side surface 67a (left side surface 67aK) of the light-blockingplate 67K and the imaginary plane X2; and the distance L2 is a shortest distance between the imaginary plane X2 and the outermost edge of thecartridge body 31 of theink cartridge 30M (30C, 30Y) in the left-right direction (i.e., the distance in the left-right direction between the imaginary plane X2 and theside surface 38 in the present embodiment). That is, in theink cartridge 30K, the interferingsurface 67b(67bK) of the light-blockingplate 67K is not aligned with theIC board 64 in the front-rear direction and is offset toward the right from the imaginary plane X2. Or the interferingsurface 67b(67bK) of the light-blockingplate 67K and theIC board 64 are arranged at different positions from each other in the left-right direction. - On the other hand, referring to
Figs. 13B to 13D , the light-blockingplates ink cartridges second protrusion 83 and the first protrusion 43) in the left-right direction. However, the specific positions of the light-blockingplates - More specifically, as illustrated in
Fig. 13B and15 , the light-blockingplate 67M of theink cartridge 30M is positioned on the imaginary plane X2 to extend therealong. The interfering surface 67bM of the light-blockingplate 67M intersects with the imaginary plane X2, in the present embodiment. As illustrated inFig. 13C , the light-blockingplate 67C of theink cartridge 30C is positioned leftward relative to the imaginary plane X2. That is, the interfering surface 67bC of the light-blockingplate 67C is positioned offset to the left relative to the imaginary plane X2. Put different way, the interfering surface 67bC of theink cartridge 30C is closer to the left edge of the upper surface 39 (left side surface 38) than the interfering surface 67bM of theink cartridge 30M is to the left edge of the upper surface 39 (left side surface 38) in the left-right direction. As illustrated inFig. 13D , the light-blockingplate 67Y of theink cartridge 30Y is positioned rightward relative to the imaginary plane X2. That is, the interfering surface 67bY of the light-blockingplate 67Y is positioned offset to the right relative to the imaginary plane X2. In other words, the interfering surfaces 67bC, 67bY of the light-blockingplate IC board 64 in the left-right direction. - Next, a process for attaching the
ink cartridge 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110 will be described with reference toFigs. 4 ,5A ,5B ,16 and17 . InFigs. 4 ,5A ,5B ,16 and17 , theink cartridge 30M is depicted as an example. - As illustrated in
Fig. 8 , in theink cartridges 30 prior to attachment to the cartridge-attachment section 110, thevalve 77 closes theink supply port 71 of the packing 76. Accordingly, at this time, ink flow to the outside of theink cartridge 30 is interrupted. Further, in this state, thevalve 97 closes theair communication port 96. Accordingly, thefirst ink chamber 32 is not opened to the atmosphere. Further, before attachment of theink cartridge 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110, theopening 112 of thecase 101 is closed by thecover 114 at the closing position. - For inserting and removing the
ink cartridge 30 into/from the cartridge-attachment section 110, the user pivots thecover 114 from the closing position to the opening position. - The
ink cartridge 30 is configured to be inserted into thecase 101 through theopening 112 of the cartridge-attachment section 110 in the upright posture: that is, in such a posture that thefront surface 40 of thecartridge body 31 faces frontward, and theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31 face upward. Since theupper portion 41U of therear surface 41 of thecartridge body 31 is positioned rearward relative to thelower portion 41L, that is, since theupper portion 41U is positioned closer to the user than thelower portion 41L is to the user, the user pushes theupper portion 41U forward to insert theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110. The bottom portion of theink cartridge 30 thus enters thecorresponding guide groove 109 provided in the bottom surface of thecase 101. - As the
ink cartridge 30 is further inserted into thecase 101, theink supply portion 34 enters thecorresponding guide portion 105. At the same time, therod 125 enters into the correspondingair communication port 96. - Further, the interfering
surface 67b of the light-blockingplate 67 arrives at thecorresponding gate 108 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. For example, in case that theink cartridge 30M is inserted into the prescribedinsertion space 111M of thecase 101, the left-right position of the interfering surface 67bM of the light-blockingplate 67M is coincident with the left-right position of theslit 119M of thegate 108M. Accordingly, as thecartridge body 31 of theink cartridge 30M is moved in theforward direction 51 along thecorresponding guide groove 109, the interfering surface 67bM passes through theslit 119M without abutting against the opposingwalls 118 of thegate 108M, and moves past thegate 108M to be positioned frontward of thegate 108M, as depicted inFig. 16 . The lockingsurface 151 is positioned still rearward of thelock shaft 145. - Here, as a comparative example, assume that the
ink cartridge 30C is inserted into theinsertion space 111M that does not correspond to theink cartridge 30C. In this case, since the left-right position of the interfering surface 67bC does not coincide with the left-right position of theslit 119M, the interfering surface 67bC abuts against the opposingwalls 118 of thegate 108M as thecartridge body 31 of theink cartridge 30C is moved in theforward direction 51 along theguide groove 109, as illustrated inFig. 18 . The interfering surface 67bC of theink cartridge 30C therefore cannot pass through theslit 119M. As a result, theink cartridge 30C cannot be inserted further forward in thefrontward direction 51 from the state depicted inFig. 18 . Accordingly, theink needle 102 does not separate thevalve 77 of theink cartridge 30C from the packing 76. That is, theink supply port 71 is not yet opened by theink needle 102 and thus theink supply potion 34 is not connected to theink needle 102. Still alternatively, theink needle 102 may be separated from theink supply port 71 of theink supply potion 34 in the front-rear direction when the interfering surface 67bC abuts against the opposingwalls 118 of thegate 108M. In the present embodiment, "theink supply potion 34 is connected to theink needle 102" denotes a state where theink needle 102 separates thevalve 77 from theink supply port 71 and theink supply port 71 is opened. Thus, inFig. 18 , theink supply potion 34 is not connected to theink needle 102, since theink needle 102 is in contact with the packing 76 but thevalve 77 still closes theink supply port 71. - In this way, the light-blocking
plate 67 of theink cartridge 30 can function as a physical key to see whether or not theink cartridge 30 is inserted into a correct one of the insertion spaces 111 (designated insertion space 111) of the cartridge-attachment section 110. - As the
ink cartridge 30M is inserted further in thefrontward direction 51 after passing through thegate 108M, theink needle 102 passes through theink supply port 71 to separate thevalve 77 from the packing 76 against the biasing force of thecoil spring 78. As a result, the vertical position of theink supply portion 34 is fixed relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110. In this state, theink cartridge 30M as a whole is applied with the biasing force of thecoil spring 78 of theink supply potion 34 so that theink cartridge 30M is urged rearward. Therod 125 having entered into theair communication port 96 abuts against thevalve 97 to separate thevalve 97 from theair communication port 96 against the biasing force of thecoil spring 98. As a result, thefirst ink chamber 32 is opened to the atmosphere through the through-hole 46, theair valve chamber 36, and theair communication port 96. - Further, the
first protrusion 43 reaches thelock shaft 145, and theinclined surface 155 is brought into contact with thelock shaft 145 and slidingly moves in thefrontward direction 51 relative to thelock shaft 145. - The
ink cartridge 30M is applied with biasing forces generated by the compressed coil springs 78 and 98 acting in therearward direction 52. The magnitude of the biasing force generated by each of the coil springs 78 and 98 is determined by a spring constant thereof and a distance thereof compressed from its natural length. The spring constant of thecoil spring 98 is smaller than the spring constant of thecoil spring 78. The compressed distance of the coil spring 78 (a distance by which thevalve 77 is separated from the ink supply port 71) is larger than the compressed distance of the coil spring 98 (a distance by which the valve 79 is separated from the air communication port 96). As a result, in a state where theink cartridge 30M is accommodated in the cartridge-attachment section 110, the magnitude of the biasing force generated by thecoil spring 78 is larger than the magnitude of the biasing force of the biasing force generated by thecoil spring 98. - The
ink cartridge 30M is also applied with a rotational moment acting in a counterclockwise direction inFig. 16 , since the user pushes theupper portion 41U of therear surface 41. However, against this rotational moment, the contact between theinclined surface 155 and thelock shaft 145 causes theink cartridge 30M to pivot in a clockwise direction inFig. 17 about a center C of theink supply port 71 of the packing 76 into which theink needle 102 is inserted. That is, the center C of theink supply port 71 serves as a pivot center of theink cartridge 30 in the present embodiment. - Incidentally, the position of the pivot center of the
ink cartridge 30 may vary depending on the shape of theink needle 102 and the shape of theink supply port 71. In the present embodiment, indeed, as shown inFigs. 4 and17 , the pivot center is a center of a portion PP at which theink needle 102 and the inner peripheral surface of the tubularink supply port 71 are in contact with each other. In the present embodiment, the pivot center is the center of the portion PP at which theink needle 102 contact the inner peripheral surface of the packing 76 defining theink supply port 71. This portion PP at which theink needle 102 and the ink supply port 71 (the inner peripheral surface of the packing 76) contact each other will be referred to as a particular portion PP hereinafter, whenever necessary. Theink cartridge 30 is thus inserted in thefrontward direction 51 in a posture illustrated inFigs. 16 and17 . The posture illustrated inFigs. 16 and17 is referred to as a second posture, hereinafter. - Since the
lower surface 42 of thecartridge body 31 is inclined relative to the front-rear direction (horizontal direction), a space is available between thelower surface 42 and the bottom surface of theguide groove 109. This space allows the above-described pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30M in the clockwise direction. - Further, since the inner diameter of the
air communication port 96 is larger than the outer diameter of therod 125, a space is also provided between therod 125 and theair communication port 96. This space also allows the pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30 in the clockwise direction. In other words, in the state where theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, therod 125 and theair communication port 96 do not contact with each other. That is, vertical positioning is not performed between therod 125 and theair communication port 96. - In the second posture, a space is also provided between the
electrodes 65 of theIC board 64 and the corresponding set ofcontacts 106 in the up-down direction. That is, theelectrodes 65 and thecontacts 106 are separated from each other in the up-down direction. Further, in the second posture as a result of the clockwise pivoting of theink cartridge 30M, thecontact surface 84 is located below thecorresponding positioning portion 107. A space is therefore formed between the positioningportion 107 and thecontact surface 84 in the up-down direction. That is, thepositioning portion 107 and theabutment part 84 are separated from each other in the up-down direction. - As the
ink cartridge 30M is further inserted forward in the frontward direction.51 from the state illustrated inFig. 16 against the biasing force of thecoil spring 78, theinclined surface 155 and thehorizontal surface 154 of thefirst protrusion 43 move frontward beyond thelock shaft 145, reaching a position closer to the end wall of thecase 101 than thelock shaft 145 is to the end wall, as illustrated inFig. 17 . In theink cartridge 30M in the second posture, the lockingsurface 151 is positioned lower relative to thelock shaft 145. - As described above, the
ink cartridge 30M(30) is applied with the rotational moment acting in the counterclockwise direction inFig. 17 due to the user's forward pushing on theupper portion 41U of therear surface 41. Also, the rotational moment acting in the clockwise direction inFig. 17 is also generated in theink cartridge 30M(30) by the biasing force of thecoil spring 98 disposed in theair valve chamber 36. In a state where theinclined surface 155 and thehorizontal surface 154 no longer abut against thelock shaft 145, theink cartridge 30M(30) is caused to pivot in the counterclockwise direction inFig. 17 about the pivot center C due to the user's pushing force against the biasing force of thecoil spring 98. Thecontact surface 84 is thereby brought into contact with thepositioning portion 107 from below. - At this time, the locking
surface 151 faces rearward and opposes thelock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction. When the user stops pushing theink cartridge 30M(30) in thefrontward direction 51, theink cartridge 30M(30) is moved rearward by the biasing force of thecoil spring 78. The lockingsurface 151 therefore moves rearward to abut against thelock shaft 145 from frontward thereof. This contact between the lockingsurface 151 and thelock shaft 145 restricts theink cartridge 30 from moving further rearward in therearward direction 52. That is, positioning of theink cartridge 30M(30) in the front-rear direction relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 is provided by the contact between the lockingsurface 151 and thelock shaft 145. - Further, since the
contact surface 84 abuts thepositioning portion 107 from below at this time, theink cartridges 30M(30) is also restricted from moving upward. That is, theink cartridge 30M(30) is prevented from pivoting further in the counterclockwise direction about the center C. This abutment between thecontact surface 84 and thepositioning portion 107 thus provides positioning of theink cartridge 30M(30) in the up-down direction. As a result, theink cartridge 30M(30) is fixed in position in thecorresponding insertion space 111M(111) of the cartridge-attachment section 110, as illustrated inFig. 4 . The posture of theink cartridge 30M(30) illustrated inFig. 4 (the attached posture) will also be referred to as a first posture, hereinafter, whenever necessary, for the sake of explanation. Thus, attachment of theink cartridge 30M(30) to the cartridge-attachment section 110 is completed. In other words, theink cartridge 30 is pivotable about the center C of theink supply port 71 to move between the first posture and the second posture. - In the embodiment, the "insertion of the
ink cartridge 30" is deemed to be completed when theink cartridge 30 is fixed in position relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110, with the lockingsurface 151 engaged with thelock shaft 145. That is, the "insertion of theink cartridge 30" is not deemed to end simply because theink needle 102 is inserted into theink supply potion 34. - In the first posture (attached posture), following forces act on the
ink cartridge 30. - That is, the
ink cartridge 30 is applied with a force acting downward (i.e., in a direction moving from the first posture to the second posture) about the center C, due to: a self-weight of theink cartridge 30; a biasing force that theIC board 64 receives from thecontacts 106; and the rotational moment acting in the clockwise direction and generated by thecoil spring 98 provided in theair valve chamber 36. On the other hand, theink cartridge 30 is also applied with a force acting upward (i.e., in a direction moving from the second posture to the first posture) about the center C due to the rotational moment acting in the counterclockwise direction, the rotational moment being generated by thecoil spring 78 in theink valve chamber 35 acting on the lockingsurface 151. Since thecontact surface 84 is in abutment with thepositioning portion 107, thecontact surface 84 is in receipt of a component of the upward force acting on theink cartridge 30, thereby providing the positioning of theink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction. - In the first posture, the
lock shaft 145 is separated in the up-down direction from thesurface 156 extending rearward from thelower edge 151L of the lockingsurface 151. That is, thelock shaft 145 does not contribute to any positioning of theink cartridge 30 in the up-down direction. Thus, in the cartridge-attachment section 110, the up-down positioning of theink cartridge 30 is performed, not by thelock shaft 145 provided separately from thecase 101, but by thepositioning portion 107 that is integrally formed with thecase 101 and that is disposed closer to the set ofcontacts 106 than thelock shaft 145 is to thecontacts 106. - Referring to
Fig. 4 , assume an imaginary arc Q of a circle that is centered on the center C and that passes a center Z of the lock shaft 145 (seeFig. 5A ). As illustrated inFig. 4 , in theink cartridge 30M(30) in the first posture, theupper edge 151U of the lockingsurface 151 is positioned outside the imaginary arc Q, while thelower edge 151L of the lockingsurface 151 is positioned inside the imaginary arc Q. Theink cartridge 30M(30) in the first posture is fixed in position by the contact between theink supply port 71 and theink needle 102 and by the contact between the lockingsurface 151 and thelock shaft 145. In this state, theink cartridge 30M(30) in the first posture is applied with the biasing force of thecoil spring 78 acting in therearward direction 52. As a result, a moment acting forward and upward is generated in theink cartridge 30M(30). This moment corresponds to a magnitude of a force urging theink cartridge 30M(30) to pivot in the counterclockwise direction about the center C. - In the
ink cartridge 30M(30) in the first posture, theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 electrically contact the correspondingcontacts 106 while elastically deforming thecontacts 106 upward. At this time, while theIC board 64 is urged downward by the elasticallydeformed contacts 106, due to the above-described moment acting on theink cartridge 30M(30), theIC board 64 is kept elastically deforming thecontacts 106. - Further, in the process of the counterclockwise pivoting of the
ink cartridge 30M from the state illustrated inFig. 17 , theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64, which are positioned rearward of the center C and forward of the lockingsurface 151, are respectively brought into contact with thecontacts 106 from below to be electrically connected thereto. That is, in the present embodiment, the direction in which theink cartridge 30 moves during insertion and removal thereof (i.e., the front-rear direction) intersects with the direction in which theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 and thecontacts 106 contact and separate from each other (i.e., the up-down direction). Accordingly, theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 are prevented from being moved in the front-rear direction relative to thecontacts 106 while being in contact with thecontacts 106, thereby suppressing generation of foreign matters such as shavings of theelectrodes 65. - After attaching the
ink cartridge 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110, the user pivots thecover 114 from the opening position to the closing position. When thecover 114 is at the closing position, thecover sensor 115 outputs a detection signal indicative of detection of thecover 114. In response to receipt of the detection signal from thecover sensor 115, thecontroller 117 determines whether or not thecutout 66 is provided in the light-blockingplate 67 of the attachedink cartridge 30, depending on signals outputted from theoptical sensor 113. Thecontroller 117 then determines the type of the attachedink cartridge 30, such as an initial capacity of theink cartridge 30 and a composition of the ink stored in theink cartridge 30, based on the presence/absence of thecutout 66. The relationship between the presence/absence of thecutout 66 and the type of theink cartridge 30 is prestored in the memory of thecontroller 117 as predetermined data. - Next, a process for removing the attached
ink cartridge 30 from the cartridge-attachment section 110 will be described. - For removing the
ink cartridge 30 from the cartridge-attachment section 110, the user first pivots thecover 114 from the closing position to the opening position and presses theoperation surface 92 of theink cartridge 30 downward. In the first posture of theink cartridge 30, theoperation surface 92 faces upward and rearward. Hence, when the user operates theoperation surface 92, a force acting downward and forward is applied theink cartridge 30. The lockingsurface 151 is separated from thelock shaft 145 by the force acting forward, and theink cartridge 30 is pivoted in the clockwise direction inFig. 4 by the downward force. As a result, as illustrated inFig. 17 , thecontact surface 84 is separated from thepositioning portion 107, and theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 are separated from therespective contacts 106. The lockingsurface 151 is also positioned downward of thelock shaft 145. That is, theink cartridge 30 is moved from the first posture to the second posture. When theIC board 64 and the lockingsurface 151 are separated from thecontacts 106 and lockshaft 145, respectively, in accordance with the change of theink cartridge 30 from the first posture to the second posture, theink cartridge 30 is moved rearward relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 due to the biasing force of thecoil spring 78. The user can therefore hold thecartridge body 31 to remove theink cartridge 30 out of the cartridge-attachment section 110. While theink cartridge 30 is withdrawn from the cartridge-attachment section 110, the light-blockingplate 67 passes through theslit 119 of thecorresponding gate 108, and moves rearward past thegate 108. - Now, how to determine the type of the
ink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 will be described while referring to a flowchart ofFig. 19 . - In the present embodiment, the
controller 117 determines the type of theink cartridges 30 mounted in theinsertion space 111 based on output signals from theoptical sensor 113. As described above, the output signals from theoptical sensor 113 vary depending on whether or not thecutout 66 is formed in the light-blockingplate 67 in the mountedink cartridge 30. - Specifically, referring to
Fig. 19 , thecontroller 117 first determines in S11 whether or not thecover 114 is at the opening position. Thecontroller 117 repeats the step S11 (S11: NO) unless thecontroller 117 receives a high level signal from thecover sensor 115. Thecontroller 117 determines that thecover 114 is at the opening position (S11: Yes) upon receipt of the high level signal from thecover sensor 115. Thecontroller 117 then determines in S12 whether or not the high level signal from theoptical sensor 113 is changed to a low level signal. The signal outputted from theoptical sensor 113 becomes low level at least once when the detection surface D of the light-blockingplate 67 of theink cartridge 30 comes between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion of theoptical sensor 113 during insertion of theink cartridges 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110. - That is, the change in signal from high level to low level at the
optical sensor 113 means that theink cartridge 30 is inserted into the designatedinsertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. For example, if theink cartridge 30M is inserted into theinsertion space 111C other than the designatedinsertion space 111M, theoptical sensor 113 of theinsertion space 111C does not output the low level signal since theoptical sensor 113 of theinsertion space 111C cannot detect the detection surface D of the light-blockingplate 67M of theink cartridge 30M that cannot passes through the slit 109C of thegate 108C, as illustrated inFig. 18 . - When the signal from the
optical sensor 113 changes to low level (S12: YES), thecontroller 117 then sets a flag stored in the memory ON in S13. That is, the ON flag means that theink cartridge 30 having the light-blocking plate 67 (detection surface D) has been inserted into the designatedinsertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. - In case that the signal from the
optical sensor 113 does not change to low level but is maintained at high level (S12: NO), thecontroller 117 then advances to the step S14. Theoptical sensor 113 continues to issue the high level signal unless the detection surface D of the light-blockingplate 67 passes theoptical sensor 113, that is, in case that theink cartridge 30 is not inserted into the designatedinsertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. Note that, here, even if theink cartridge 30 without the light-blocking plate 67 (detection surface D) is inserted into the designatedinsertion space 111, theoptical sensor 113 continues to output the high level signal (S12: NO) since the light from theoptical sensor 113 is not interrupted. Thecontroller 117 therefore advances to the step S14. - The
controller 117 then determines in S14 whether or not thecover 114 is closed. Specifically, when the signal outputted from thecover sensor 115 changes to low level, thecontroller 117 determines that thecover 114 is at the closing position (S14: YES) and advances to the step S15. Thecontroller 117 goes back to the step S12 as long as the signal from thecover sensor 115 remains at high level and does not change to low level (S14: NO). - After the
cover 114 is determined to be at the closing position in S14, thecontroller 117 determines in S15 whether or not accessing to theIC board 64 through thecontacts 106 can be made. In case that thecontroller 117 cannot access the IC board 64 (S15: NO), thecontroller 117 determines in S21 that theink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. In this case, thecontroller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him that theink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, for example, through a message such as "No Cartridge" on a display. - In case that the
controller 117 can access the IC board 64 (S15: YES), thecontroller 117 determines in S16 whether or not the flag stored in the memory is ON. When the flag is not ON (S16: NO), thecontroller 117 determines in S20 that theink cartridge 30 without the light-blockingplate 67 is attached. In this case, thecontroller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him that the inserted ink cartridge is abnormal, for example, through a message such as "Unable to Detect Cartridge" on the display. Theink cartridge 30 may lose the light-blockingplate 67, for example, due to some kind of damages impinged on the light-blockingplate 67. - When the flag is ON (S16: YES), the
controller 117 then determines in S17 whether the signal outputted from theoptical sensor 113 is high level or low level. In case that the signal from theoptical sensor 113 is a high level signal (S17: High), thecontroller 117 determines in S18 that the attachedink cartridge 30 belongs to a type A. That is, theink cartridge 30 having the light-blockingplate 67 formed with thecutout 66 as shown inFigs. 6 to 8 , for example, belongs to the type A. Theoptical sensor 113 is configured to output the high level signal in case that thecutout 66 is formed in the light-blockingplate 67 of the attachedink cartridge 30. Thecartridge 30 of the type A may be a high-capacity cartridge whose initial capacity of ink is large, for example. In case that thecontroller 117 determines that the attachedink cartridge 30 belongs to the type A, thecontroller 117 may set an initial number of sheets that theprinter 10 can print with the initial amount of ink stored in theink cartridge 30 of the type A. Alternatively, thecontroller 117 may set a threshold value corresponding to the initial amount of ink stored in theink cartridge 30 of the type A. Thecontroller 117 may halt printing operations if theprinter 10 has used an amount of ink larger than the threshold value, or may give a warning to the user to inform him that little ink is left in the attachedink cartridge 30. - In case that the signal outputted from the
optical sensor 113 is a low level signal (S17: Low), thecontroller 117 determines in S19 that the attachedink cartridge 30 belongs to a type B. That is, theink cartridge 30 having the light-blockingplate 67 without thecutout 66 as shown inFig. 18 , for example, belongs to the type B. Theoptical sensor 113 is configured to output the low level signal in case that thecutout 66 is not formed in the light-blockingplate 67 of the attachedink cartridge 30. Thecartridge 30 of the type B may be a low-capacity cartridge whose initial capacity of ink is not large, or smaller than the initial capacity of ink of theink cartridge 30 of the type A. In case that thecontroller 117 determines that the attachedink cartridge 30 belongs to the type B, thecontroller 117 may set an initial number of sheets that theprinter 10 can print with the initial amount of ink stored in theink cartridge 30 of the type B. Alternatively, thecontroller 117 may set a threshold value corresponding to the initial amount of ink stored in theink cartridge 30 of the type B. Thecontroller 117 may halt printing operations if theprinter 10 has used an amount of ink larger than the threshold value, or may give a warning to the user to inform him that little ink is left in the attachedink cartridge 30. - In the
ink cartridge 30 according to the present embodiment, the interferingsurface 67b is disposed frontward and downward relative to theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64. TheIC board 64 is positioned upward relative to thefirst ink chamber 32 and thesecond ink chamber 33. With this structure, thegate 108 corresponding to the interferingsurface 67b is less likely to contact theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 during the insertion of theink cartridge 30 into thecorresponding insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. - Further, this structure of the interfering
surface 67b can prevent theink cartridge 30 inserted into theincorrect insertion space 111 from becoming attached in theincorrect insertion space 111. That is, due to the interference between the interferingsurface 67b of the incorrectly insertedink cartridge 30 and the opposingwalls 118 of theincorrect gate 108, theink supply potion 34 of the incorrectly insertedink cartridge 30 can be prevented from being connected to theink needle 102; and the incorrectly insertedink cartridge 30 is prevented from being locked by thelock shaft 145 in theincorrect insertion space 111. - Further, the
ink cartridge 30 of the present embodiment includes the light-blockingplate 67. The light-blockingplate 67 is positioned rearward relative to the interferingsurface 67b in the attached posture. The light-blockingplate 67 has a light-blocking surface 67a (detection surface D) extending in thefrontward direction 51 anddownward direction 53. The light-blockingplate 67 of theink cartridge 30 is configured to block or attenuate the light traveling in the left-right direction during insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 as well as at the time of completion of attachment to the cartridge-attachment section 110. That is, the light-blockingplate 67 of the embodiment is configured to be detected by the correspondingoptical sensor 113 not only during insertion of theink cartridge 30 but also in a state where theink cartridge 30 is in the attached posture. - The light-blocking
plate 67 may or may not have thecutout 66 formed therein, depending on the type of theink cartridge 30, for example, depending on the initial capacity of ink stored in theink cartridge 30 in the present embodiment. With this structure, the type of theink cartridge 30 can be determined by detecting the presence or absence of thecutout 66 of the light-blockingplate 67, using theoptical sensor 113. - As shown in
Fig. 18 , the interferingsurface 67b of theink cartridge 30 is configured to abut against thegate 108 provided at theinsertion space 111 other than the designatedinsertion space 111 before thevalve 77 is opened by theink needle 102 and theink supply potion 34 is connected to theink needle 102. With this structure, the ink stored in theink cartridge 30 is prevented from being supplied to thesub tank 28 of a different color. - Further, the interfering
surface 67b is aligned with the light-blocking plate 67 (side surfaces 67a) in the front-rear direction. This arrangement of the interferingsurface 67b and the side surfaces 67a of the light-blockingplate 67 can realize downsizing of the light-blockingplate 67 in the left-right direction and in the up-down direction. - Further, the width W1 of the interfering
surface 67b in the left-right direction is smaller than the width W2 (shortest distance in the left-right direction between one of the outer edges of theupper surface 39 and one of the side surfaces 67a of the light-blockingplate 67K). In other words, since the width W2 is greater than the width W1, there can be provided relatively wider spaces at both sides of the interferingsurface 67b and the light-blockingplate 67 on theupper surface 39 of thecartridge body 31 in the left-right direction. Thus, in the cartridge-attachment section 110, in regions corresponding to these spaces on the upper surface of theink cartridge 30 within theinsertion space 111, those components configured to make access to theink cartridge 30, such as thecontacts 106 andoptical sensor 113, can be arranged. - Further, since the interfering
surface 67b is constituted as the front surface of the light-blockingplate 67, the structure of the interferingsurface 67b can be simplified. - Further, the sloped surface 67d is provided to connect the interfering
surface 67b and the upper surface 67c of the light-blockingplate 67. This structure can reduce a possibility that the interferingsurface 67b and the light-blockingplate 67 may be damaged when theink cartridge 30 is dropped on the floor with theupper cover 31U facing downward. - Further, in the
ink cartridge 30K, the interfering surface 67bK and theIC board 64 do not overlap each other in the left-right direction, i.e., arranged at different positions from each other in the left-right direction. With this structure, thegate 108 corresponding to the interferingsurface 67b is further less likely to make contact with theIC board 64 during the insertion of theink cartridge 30K into theinsertion space 111K of the cartridge-attachment section 110. - Further, the
IC board 64 is disposed frontward of the lockingsurface 151 and downward of theupper edge 151U of the lockingsurface 151. With this structure, thelock shaft 145 is suppressed from making contact with theIC board 64 and the interferingsurface 67b during the insertion of theink cartridge 30 into thecorresponding insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. - Further, the
IC board 64 and the interferingsurface 67b are provided on theupper cover 31U. Accordingly, thelower case 31L can be made common to theink cartridges ink cartridges - Further, in the
insertion space 111K, thegate 108K (slit 119K) corresponding to the interfering surface 67bK of theink cartridge 30K is positioned outward relative to a position corresponding to the outermost edge (right side surface 37) of thecartridge body 31 of any one of theink cartridges ink cartridges insertion space 111K. - Further, with regard to the
gates respective insertion spaces gate 108C and thecontacts 106 in the left-right direction in theinsertion space 111C is different from a relative position between thegate 108M and the correspondingcontacts 106 in the left-right direction in thecorresponding insertion space 111M. Likewise, the relative position between thegate 108C and thecontacts 106 in the left-right direction in theinsertion space 111C is also different from a relative position between thegate 108Y and the correspondingcontacts 106 in the left-right direction in thecorresponding insertion space 111Y. This structure can prevent theink cartridges insertion spaces 111 other than the prescribedinsertion space 111. Thus, theink cartridge 30C is prevented from being inserted into theinsertion space 111M or into theinsertion space 111Y. Theink cartridge 30M is prevented from being inserted into theinsertion space 111C or into theinsertion space 111Y. Theink cartridge 30Y is also prevented from being inserted into theinsertion space 111C or into theinsertion space 111M. - In the following, various modifications to the depicted embodiment will be described. Like parts and components will be designated with the same reference numerals as those of the depicted embodiment to avoid duplicating explanation.
- In the above-described embodiment, the interfering
surface 67b constitutes the front surface of the light-blockingplate 67. However, the interferingsurface 67b and the light-blockingplate 67 need not necessarily be formed integrally. For example, as illustrated inFig. 20 , anink cartridge 230 may include aprotrusion 285 having an interferingsurface 285b, and a light-blockingplate 267 having a light-blockingsurface 267a as the detection surface D. That is, the protrusion 285 (interferingsurface 285b) and light-blocking plate 267 (light-blockingsurface 267a) are provided independently of each other. As in the embodiment, the interferingsurface 285b is arranged to be aligned with the light-blockingplate 267 in the front-rear direction. Theprotrusion 285 is positioned frontward of the light-blockingplate 267 in the front-rear direction. The light-blockingplate 267 is configured to block the light from the correspondingoptical sensor 113 during insertion of theink cartridge 230 and in the attached posture of theink cartridge 230. The light-blockingplate 267 shown inFig. 20 is not formed with a cutout. - Incidentally, in this configuration of the first modification, the
protrusion 285 may be configured not to block light. That is, in case that theprotrusion 285 and the light-blockingplate 267 are provided as separate members from each other, theprotrusion 285 may or may not be made of a material capable of transmitting light therethrough (translucent resin, for example). - With this structure, by separating the interfering
surface 285b from the light-blockingplate 267, impact, which will be impinged on the interferingsurface 285b at the time of wrong insertion of theink cartridge 230, is prevented from being directly transmitted to the light-blockingplate 267. Further, in case that theprotrusion 285 is capable of transmitting light, theprotrusion 285 does not disturb detection of the light-blockingplate 267 by the correspondingoptical sensor 113 during insertion of theink cartridge 230 into thecorresponding insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. - Further,
Figs. 21 and22 depict anink cartridge 330 according to a second modification to the embodiment. - The
ink cartridge 330 includes acartridge body 331 configured of anupper cover 331U and alower case 331L. Thecartridge body 331 includes afront surface 340, arear surface 341, anupper surface 339, abottom surface 342, side surfaces 337 and 338, asub-lower wall 348, and a connectingwall 349 corresponding to thefront surface 40, therear surface 41, theupper surface 39, thebottom surface 42, the side surfaces 37 and 38, thesub-lower wall 48, and the connectingwall 49 of theink cartridge 30 of the embodiment, respectively. InFig. 21 , the side wall 337 is not shown. Theink supply potion 34 is provided at the connectingwall 349, as in the embodiment. - In a side view, as shown in
Fig. 21 , theink cartridge 330 has the same configuration on theupper surface 339 as that on theupper surface 39 of theink cartridge 30 of the embodiment. Note that theink cartridge 330 shown inFig. 21 includes the light-blockingplate 67 without thecutout 66. That is, a portion of the light-blockingplate 67 corresponding to the cutout 66 (a portion indicated by a circle in a broken line inFig. 21 ) now serves as the detection surface D. That is, the light from theoptical sensor 113 is configured be incident on the circled portion on the detection surface D. - In the depicted embodiment, the
coil spring 98 is disposed in theair valve chamber 36 to move thevalve 97 to open and close theair communication port 96. Accordingly, while theink cartridge 30 is inserted into and attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, theink cartridge 30 receives the urging force acting in the clockwise direction (by the coil spring 98) as well as the urging force acting in the counterclockwise direction (by thecoil spring 78 of the ink supply potion 34). - In contrast, referring to
Fig. 22 , theink cartridge 330 according to the second modification does not include thevalve 97 and thecoil spring 98. That is, theink cartridge 330 is configured to receive the urging force of thecoil spring 78 of theink supply potion 34 as an urging force acting in therearward direction 52 during insertion and attachment of theink cartridge 330 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110. - More specifically, once the
ink needle 102 is inserted into theink supply port 71 and connected to theink supply potion 34, since no downward rotational moment is applied to theink cartridge 330, theink cartridge 330 is applied with the upward rotational moment about the center C (portion PP) by the urging force of thecoil spring 78 acting in the counterclockwise direction, in addition to the user's forward pushing of an upper portion of therear surface 341. Theink cartridge 330 is therefore pivoted counterclockwise from the second posture to the first posture. As a result, as in the depicted embodiment, theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 are brought into contact with thecontacts 106 from below to be electrically connected thereto; and thecontact surface 84 is brought into contact with thepositioning portion 107 from below. As the user releases his fingers from theink cartridge 330, theink cartridge 330 is moved in therearward direction 52 due to the urging force of thecoil spring 78, causing the lockingsurface 151 to abut against thelock shaft 145 from its front side. Theink cartridge 330 is thus fixed in position in the front-rear direction. That is, the lockingsurface 151 receives the rearward moment applied from thecoil spring 78, thereby maintaining theink cartridge 330 in the attached state (in the first posture or upright posture). - In the
ink cartridge 330 of the second modification as well, the light-blockingplate 67 and theIC board 64 are arranged on theupper surface 39 constituting thecartridge body 31 such that the interferingsurface 67b of the light-blockingplate 67 is disposed frontward and downward relative to theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64. With this structure, thegate 108 corresponding to the interferingsurface 67b is less likely to contact theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 during the insertion of theink cartridge 330 into thecorresponding insertion space 111 of the cartridge-attachment section 110. - Further, as in the
ink cartridge 30 of the depicted embodiment, positioning of theink cartridge 330 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 is provided: by the abutment of the lockingsurface 151 against thelock shaft 145 in the front-rear direction; and by the contact of thecontact surface 84 with thepositioning portion 107 in the up-down direction. With this simple structure of the second embodiment as well, stable positioning of theink cartridge 330 relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110 can be realized. - Still further, as in the
ink cartridge 30 of the depicted embodiment, in the attached state of theink cartridge 330, the rearward urging force of thecoil spring 78 is stably received by the lockingsurface 151 that is in contact with thelock shaft 145, thereby preventing theink cartridge 330 from moving further in therearward direction 52 and providing positioning of theink cartridge 330 in the front-rear direction relative to the cartridge-attachment section 110. Accordingly, the contact pressure between theelectrodes 65 of theIC board 64 and thecontacts 106 can be stably maintained. - Further, with this structure of the second modification, the same technical and operational advantages as those of the embodiment can be obtained.
- In the depicted embodiment, the
cartridge body 31 is configured of two different members, i.e., theupper cover 31U and thelower case 31L attached to each other. However, thecartridge body 31 may be formed as a single member, without including an upper cover and a lower case. -
Figs. 23A and 23B illustrate anink cartridge 43 according to a third modification to the embodiment. Theink cartridge 430 includes acartridge body 431 of a rectangular parallelepiped shape. Thecartridge body 431 includes afront wall 440, arear wall 441, anupper wall 439, abottom wall 442 and side walls 437 and 438. Each of thesewalls ink cartridge 430. In other words, thecartridge body 431 is not configured of a cover and a case. Thus, an upper surface of theupper wall 439 constitutes an upper surface of thecartridge body 431. A front surface of thefront wall 440 constitutes a front surface of thecartridge body 431. The front surface of the front wall 440 (front surface of the cartridge body 431) is a flat surface, unlike the front surface (40, 49, 95) of theink cartridge 30 of the embodiment. A rear surface of therear wall 441 constitutes a rear surface of thecartridge body 431. The rear surface of the rear wall 441 (rear surface of the cartridge body 431) is a flat surface, although therear surface 41 of theink cartridge 30 of the embodiment is configured of two portions (upper portion 41U andlower portion 41L). - An
ink chamber 432 is defined inside thecartridge body 431. More specifically, theink chamber 432 is defined by inner surfaces of thefront wall 440, therear wall 441, theupper wall 439, thebottom wall 442 and the side walls 437 and 438. An upper end region in the ink chamber 432 (a region above an ink surface of ink stored in the ink chamber 432) is in communication with ambient air through anair communication port 496 formed in theupper wall 439. Note that, theair communication port 496 may not necessarily be formed in theupper wall 439, but may be formed in one of other walls constituting thecartridge body 431. For example, theair communication port 496 may be formed in one of the side walls 437 and 438. - An
ink supply portion 434 is provided at thefront wall 440. In this modification, theink supply potion 434 is a through-hole formed in a lower end portion of thefront wall 440 to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. Theink supply potion 434 defines anink supply port 471 that is open frontward on the front surface of thefront wall 440. - On the
upper surface 439, a light-blockingplate 467, anIC board 464, acontact surface 484 and afirst protrusion 443 having a lockingsurface 451 are arranged in the front-rear direction, as in the depicted embodiment. Specifically, the light-blockingplate 467, theIC board 464, thecontact surface 484, and the lockingsurface 451 are aligned with one another in the front-rear direction in this order from the front toward the rear. The light-blockingplate 467 is positioned frontward and downward relative to theIC board 64. The front surface of the light-blockingplate 467 serves as an interferingsurface 467b. The light-blockingplate 467 has side surfaces including the detection surface D. The light-blockingplate 467 shown inFigs. 23A and 23B is not formed with a cutout (i.e., theink cartridge 430 shown inFigs. 23A and 23B belongs to the type B). Thecontact surface 484 is arranged between theIC board 464 and the lockingsurface 451 in the front-rear direction. Thecontact surface 484 is positioned upward relative to theIC board 464 but downward relative to an upper edge (denoted as the point PI) of the lockingsurface 451. The upper edge (the point PI) of the lockingsurface 451 is the highest (farthest away from the upper surface 439) among all parts disposed at theupper surface 439 between the light-blockingplate 467 and the lockingsurface 451 in the front-rear direction. That is, the upper edge (the point P1) of the lockingsurface 451 constitutes an uppermost edge of theink cartridge 430 between the light-blockingplate 467 and the lockingsurface 451. The lockingsurface 451 is positioned closer to therear wall 441 than to theIC board 464 in the front-rear direction. - With this structure, since the detection surface D (light-blocking surface) of the light-blocking
plate 467 is positioned frontward and downward relative to thecontact surface 484, thepositioning portion 107 of theprinter 10, which is configured to contact thecontact surface 484, is less likely to interfere with the light-blocking plate 467 (i.e., the interferingsurface 467b and the detection surface D) during insertion of theink cartridge 430 into the cartridge-attachment section 110, Further, thelock shaft 145 of the cartridge-attachment section 110, which is configured to engage thelocking surface 451, is less likely to interfere with thecontact surface 484, the detection surface D (interferingsurface 467b), and theIC board 64 during the insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110. - With this structure of the third modification, the same technical and operational advantages as those of the embodiment can be obtained.
- In the depicted embodiment, the light-blocking
plate 67 is disposed on the upper surface 39 (a portion of theupper surface 39 other than the raisedportion 39A). However, the light-blockingplate 67 may be provided to extend frontward from the raisedportion 39A. That is, the light-blockingplate 67 may be connected to at least one of the raised portion and the portion other than the raisedportion 39A on theupper surface 39. -
Fig. 24 shows still another example of the light-blockingplate 67. Anink cartridge 530 according to a fourth modification includes acartridge body 531 including a flatfront wall 540, a flatrear wall 541, a flatupper surface 539 and aflat bottom wall 542. Theink supply potion 34 is provided at thefront wall 540. On theupper surface 539, thefirst protrusion 443 and asecond protrusion 583 supporting theIC board 64 is disposed. Thefirst protrusion 443 and thesecond protrusion 583 are aligned with one another in the front-rear direction, as in the embodiment. A light-blockingplate 567 is connected to a front surface of thesecond protrusion 583 and extends frontward therefrom. That is, the light-blockingplate 567 is not directly connected to theupper surface 539, and an interferingsurface 567b of the light-blockingplate 567 is connected to the front surface of thesecond protrusion 583. - With this structure of the fourth modification, the same technical and operational advantages as those of the embodiment can be obtained.
- In the embodiment, in case that the
ink cartridge 30M is erroneously inserted into theinsertion space 111C, due to the interference between the interfering surface 67bM of theink cartridge 30M and thegate 108C disposed in theinsertion space 111C, theink cartridge 30M cannot move further forward from the state illustrated inFig. 18 . At this time, thevalve 77 is not yet opened by theink needle 102, and therefore the ink in theink cartridge 30M (ink of magenta color) is not allowed to flow into the tank 103 (or the sub tank 28) corresponding to the yellow color in the cartridge-attachment section 110. That is, in the embodiment, the interferingsurface 67b(67bM) is configured to abut against the incorrect gate 108(108C) before theink supply potion 34 is connected to theink needle 102. - Alternatively, the
ink supply potion 34 may be connected to theink needle 102 before the interfering surface 67bM abuts against thegate 108C as a result of wrong insertion of theink cartridge 30M into theinsertion space 111C. - Specifically, in this case, as shown in
Fig. 25 , thevalve 77 is opened by theink needle 102 and theink supply potion 34 is connected to theink needle 102 in a state where the interfering surface 67bM of anink cartridge 630M is in abutment with thegate 108C disposed in theinsertion space 111C. Theink cartridge 630M cannot be inserted further frontward from the state illustrated inFig. 25 , At this time, since the lockingsurface 451 of theink cartridge 630M is positioned rearward of thelock shaft 145, i.e., the lockingsurface 451 is separated from thelock shaft 145 in thefrontward direction 51, the lockingsurface 451 cannot engage with thelock shaft 145. Thus, theink cartridge 630M is prevented from being attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. - That is, the interfering surface 67bM of the
ink cartridge 630M can prevent theink cartridge 630M from being completely attached to theincorrect insertion space 111C (i.e., theink cartridge 630M is prevented from being engaged with the lock shaft 145), although theink supply potion 34 of theink cartridge 630M is connected to theink needle 102 of theincorrect insertion space 111C. This structure allows the user to realize that theink cartridge 630M is inserted into the incorrect insertion space 111 (insertion space 111C), thereby encouraging the user to insert theink cartridge 630M into thecorrect insertion space 111M. - With this structure of the fifth modification, the same technical and operational advantages as those of the embodiment can be obtained.
- In the above-described embodiment, the
controller 117 is configured to determine the type of theink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on the presence/absence of thecutout 66 in the light-blockingplate 67, during insertion of theink cartridge 30 into the cartridge-attachment section 110 and at the time of completion of the attachment of theink cartridge 30 to the cartridge-attachment section 110. Alternatively, assuming that thecutout 66 is not formed in each light-blockingplate 67, thecontroller 117 may be configured to determine whether or not theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on presence/absence of the light-blockingplate 67. - Specifically, referring to a flowchart of
Fig. 26 , thecontroller 117 first determines in S101 whether or not thecover 114 is closed. Specifically, when the signal outputted from thecover sensor 115 changes to low level, thecontroller 117 determines that thecover 114 is at the closing position (S101: YES) and advances to the step S102. Thecontroller 117 repeats the step S101 as long as the signal from thecover sensor 115 remains at high level and does not change to low level (S101: NO). - After the
cover 114 is determined to be at the closing position in S101, thecontroller 117 determines in S102 whether or not accessing to theIC board 64 through thecontacts 106 can be made. For example, thecontroller 117 may determine whether or not the accessing to theIC board 64 is possible based on: whether or not a specific voltage can be applied to the IC board 64 (i.e., based on absence or presence of the IC board 64); or whether or not thecontroller 117 can get access to a memory of theIC board 64. - In case that the
controller 117 cannot access the IC board 64 (S102: NO), thecontroller 117 determines in S106 that theink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. In this case, thecontroller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him that theink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, for example, through a message such as "No Cartridge" on the display. - In case that the
controller 117 can access the IC board 64 (S102: YES), thecontroller 117 determines in S103 whether the signal outputted from theoptical sensor 113 is high level or low level. In case that the signal from theoptical sensor 113 is a high level signal (S103: High), thecontroller 117 determines in S104 that anabnormal ink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. Theoptical sensor 113 is configured to output the high level signal in case that the light-blockingplate 67 is not provided at the attachedink cartridge 30. Thus, thecontroller 117 determines the attachedink cartridge 30 is abnormal. In case that thecontroller 117 determines that the attachedink cartridge 30 is abnormal, thecontroller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him so, for example, through a message such as "Abnormal Cartridge Attached" on the display. - In case that the signal outputted from the
optical sensor 113 is a low level signal (S103: Low), thecontroller 117 determines in S105 that theink cartridge 30 is correctly attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110, Here, theoptical sensor 113 is configured to output the low level signal, since the light-blockingplate 67 of the attachedink cartridge 30 blocks the light emitted from theoptical sensor 113. In other words, thecontroller 117 is configured to determine whether or not theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 by detecting the presence/absence of the light-blockingplate 67. According to this variation, theink cartridge 30 is determined to be attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in case that: thecontroller 117 can access theIC board 64; and the light-blockingplate 67 blocks or attenuates the light from theoptical sensor 113. - Still another variation is conceivable with regard to the determination performed by the
controller 117. - In the depicted embodiment, the
controller 117 may determine whether or not theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on whether or not accessing to theIC board 64 is possible; and thecontroller 117 is configured to determine the type of theink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on the presence/absence of thecutout 66 in the light-blockingplate 67. - However, the
controller 117 may determine whether or not theink cartridge 30 is attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 based on presence or absence of the light-blockingplate 67; and thecontroller 117 may further determine whether or not the attachedink cartridge 30 is abnormal based on whether or not accessing to theIC board 64 is possible. Assume in this case as well that thecutout 66 is not formed in each light-blockingplate 67. - More specifically, referring to a flowchart of
Fig. 27 , thecontroller 117 first determines in S201 whether or not thecover 114 is closed. Specifically, when the signal outputted from thecover sensor 115 changes to low level, thecontroller 117 determines that thecover 114 is at the closing position (S201: YES) and advances to the step S202. Thecontroller 117 repeats the step S201 as long as the signal from thecover sensor 115 remains at high level and does not change to low level (S201: NO). - After the
cover 114 is determined to be at the closing position in S201, thecontroller 117 determines in S202 whether the signal outputted from theoptical sensor 113 is high level or low level. Theoptical sensor 113 is configured to output the high level signal in case that the light-blockingplate 67 is not provided at the attachedink cartridge 30 and thus the light from theoptical sensor 113 is not blocked or attenuated by the light-blockingplate 67. In case that the signal from theoptical sensor 113 is a high level signal (S202: High), thecontroller 117 determines in S206 that theink cartridge 30 is not attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. In case that thecontroller 117 determines in S206 that noink cartridge 30 is attached, thecontroller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him so, for example, through a message such as "No Cartridge" on the display. - In case that the signal from the
optical sensor 113 is a low level signal (S202: Low), thecontroller 117 then determines in S203 whether or not accessing to theIC board 64 can be made. For example, thecontroller 117 may determine whether or not the accessing to theIC board 64 is possible based on: whether or not a specific voltage can be applied to the IC board 64 (i.e., based on absence or presence of the IC board 64); or whether or not thecontroller 117 can get access to a memory of theIC board 64. - In case that the
controller 117 cannot access the IC board 64 (S203: NO), thecontroller 117 determines in S204 that the attachedink cartridge 30 is abnormal. In case that thecontroller 117 determines that the attachedink cartridge 30 is abnormal, thecontroller 117 may give a warning to the user to inform him so, for example, through a message such as "Abnormal Cartridge Attached" on the display. - In case that the
controller 117 can access the IC board 64 (S203: YES), thecontroller 117 determines in S205 that theink cartridge 30 is correctly attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110. - Further, in the above-described embodiment, the
ink cartridge 30 is pivotable about the center C of theink supply port 71 to move between the first posture and the second posture. Alternatively, the pivot center may be positioned other than theink supply port 71. For example, the pivot center may be a prescribed position on a particular portion of an outer surface of thecylinder 75 that contacts theguide portion 105. Alternatively, in case that a member may be provided at the cartridge-attachment section 110 so as to make contact with thesub-lower wall 48 of the attachedink cartridge 30, the pivot center may be set to a position at which the member and thesub-lower wall 48 contact each other. In the embodiment, since the center C of theink supply port 71 is defined as the pivot center, theink needle 102 inserted in theink supply port 71 is less likely to come off the packing 76 during pivotal movement of theink cartridge 30 between the first posture and the second posture, thereby suppressing leakage of ink. - Still alternatively, the
ink cartridge 30 may be configured to slide in the up-down direction to move between the first posture and the second posture. - Further, instead of the
cartridge body 31 configured of theupper cover 31U and thelower case 31L, the cartridge body may have a nesting structure configured of two separate members: an inner case and an outer case that houses the inner case therein. In this case, the inner case defines an ink chamber therein, and the outer case constitutes an outer shell of thecartridge body 31. - Further, in the depicted embodiment, the light-blocking
plate 67 is connected to the raisedportion 39A constituting theupper surface 39 of theink cartridge 30. However, theupper surface 39 does not necessarily include the raisedportion 39A, but may be a flat plane, as in the third modification shown inFigs. 23A and 23B . Further, even if theupper surface 39 includes therear portion 39A (i.e., theupper surface 39 has a stepped structure as in the embodiment), the light-blockingplate 67 is not necessarily connected to therear portion 39A. - Further, in the above-described embodiment, four kinds of the
ink cartridges insertion spaces ink cartridges 30 may be provided as one set of the printing-fluid cartridges. - Further, in the above-described embodiment, the
coil spring 78 of theink supply portion 34 functions to urge theink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 rearward. However, a different structure from the depicted configuration may be employed for urging theink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 rearward. - For example, a spring for biasing the
ink cartridge 30 rearward may be provided at a position other than theink supply portion 34. A spring may be provided at thefront surface 40 of thecartridge body 31 to extend frontward therefrom for urging theink cartridges 30 rearward. Alternatively, a spring may be disposed at the end wall of thecase 101 to extend rearward therefrom to urge theink cartridge 30 attached to the cartridge-attachment section 110 in therearward direction 52. - In the depicted embodiment, the
coil spring 98 is disposed within theair valve chamber 36 to move thevalve 97 to open and close theair communication port 96. Thiscoil spring 98 also serves to urge theink cartridge 30 rearward in the depicted embodiment. However, a coil spring different from thecoil spring 98 may be provided solely for urging theink cartridge 30 in therearward direction 52. For example, assuming that theair communication port 96 is formed in the connectingwall 95 or in an outer wall other than thefront wall 40, a coil spring may be disposed at the connectingwall 95 or somewhere in an inner space defined in theupper cover 31U such that the coil spring does not serves to open thefirst ink chamber 32 to the atmosphere. - Further, while ink serves as an example of the printing fluid in the depicted embodiment, the printing fluid of the present disclosure is not limited to ink. For example, a pretreatment liquid that is ejected onto sheets prior to ink during a printing operation may be stored in the printing-fluid cartridge. Alternatively, cleaning water for cleaning the
recoding head 21 may be stored in the printing-fluid cartridge. Still further, powder-like material having fluidity, such as toner, may be used as the printing fluid. - The
ink cartridges ink cartridge 30C is an example of a first printing-fluid cartridge. Theink cartridge 30M is an example of a second printing-fluid cartridge. Theink cartridge 30Y is an example of a third printing-fluid cartridge. Theink cartridge 30K is an example of a fourth printing-fluid cartridge. Theink cartridge 630M is also an example of a first printing-fluid cartridge. Thefirst ink chamber 32, thesecond ink chamber 33, and theink chamber 432 are an example of a storage chamber. The ink is an example of printing-fluid. Theink supply portions ink supply ports walls cartridge bodies plates IC boards electrodes 65 are an example of an electrical interface. The interferingsurfaces 67b(67bM, 67bC, 67bY, 67bK), 285b, 467b, 567b are an example of an interfering surface. Thecutout 66 is an example of a light-transmission portion. Thevalve 77 is an example of a closing member. Thefrontward direction 51 is an example of an insertion direction. Therearward direction 52 is an example of a removal direction. The left-right direction is an example of a widthwise direction. Thelower case 31L is an example of a case, and theupper cover 31U is an example of an upper cover. Theprotrusion 285 is an example of a protrusion. Thesecond protrusion 583 is an example of a protrusion. Thelock shaft 145 is an example of a lock portion. Theinsertion spaces 111 are an example of insertion spaces. Theinsertion space 111C is an example of a first insertion space. Theinsertion space 111M is an example of a second insertion space. Theinsertion space 111Y is an example of athird insertion space 111Y. Thecontacts 106 are an example of a contact. Thecontacts 106 disposed in theinsertion space 111C is an example of a first contact. Thecontacts 106 disposed in theinsertion space 111M is an example of a second contact. Theink needle 102 is an example of a tube. Thegate 108 is an example of a projection. Thegate 108C disposed in theinsertion space 111C is an example of a first projection. Thegate 108M disposed in theinsertion space 111M is an example of a second projection. Theoptical sensor 113 is an example of an optical sensor. Thecontroller 117 is an example of a determiner. Theopening 112 is an example of an opening. Thecover 114 is an example of a cover. Thecover sensor 115 is an example of a cover sensor. Theprinter 10 is an example of a printing-fluid consuming apparatus. The cartridge-attachment section 110 is an example of a cartridge-attachment section. The imaginary plane X2 is an example of an imaginary plane. The imaginary plane X3 is an example of a second imaginary plane. - The following statements correspond to the claims of the parent application:
- 1. A printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) configured to be inserted into a prescribed insertion space (111) of a cartridge-attachment section (110) in an insertion direction (51) crossing a gravitational direction (53) to be attached to the cartridge-attachment section (110) in an attached posture, the printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) comprising:
- a housing (31, 331, 431, 531) defining a width in a widthwise direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (51) and the gravitational direction in the attached posture, the housing (31, 331, 431, 531) comprising:
- a storage chamber (32, 33, 432) configured to store printing fluid therein;
- a front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) facing frontward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture;
- a rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541) away from the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) in a removal direction (52) opposite to the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541) facing rearward in the attached posture, the storage chamber (32, 33, 432) being positioned between the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) and the rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture; and
- an upper surface (39, 339, 439, 539) extending between the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) and the rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541), the upper surface (39, 339, 439, 539) being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33, 432) and facing upward in the attached posture;
- a supply portion (34, 434) provided at the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) and having a supply hole (71, 471), the printing fluid being configured to flow out of the storage chamber (32, 33, 432) through the supply hole (71, 471) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture;
- an electrical interface (64, 65, 464) disposed at the upper surface (39, 339, 439, 539) and facing upward in the attached posture; and
- an interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33, 342) in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) extending in the widthwise direction in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) being positioned downward and frontward in the insertion direction (51) relative to the electrical interface (64, 65, 464) in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) being configured to abut against a projection (108) provided at another insertion space (111) different from the prescribed insertion space (111) of the cartridge-attachment section (110) during an insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) into the another insertion space (111).
- 2. The printing-fluid cartridge (30) as claimed in
claim 1, wherein the housing (31) further comprises an inner surface (40R) that defines a front edge of the storage chamber (32, 33) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b) being positioned rearward relative to the inner surface (40R) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture. - 3. The printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) as claimed in
claim 1 or 2, further comprising a light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) disposed at the housing (31, 331, 431, 531), the light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) being positioned rearward relative to the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) including a light-blocking surface (67a, 267a, D) extending in the insertion direction (51) and the gravitational direction (53) in the attached posture. - 4. The printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) as claimed in claim 3, wherein at least one of:
- the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) and the light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) are aligned with each other in the insertion direction (51);
- the interfering surface (67b) has a first width (W1) in the widthwise direction, wherein the upper surface (39) has a first outer edge (38) and a second outer edge (37) opposite to each other in the widthwise direction, and wherein the light-blocking wall (67) has outer edges (67a) opposite to each other in the widthwise direction, the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) being positioned closer to one of the outer edges (67a) of the light-blocking wall (67) than the first outer edge (38) is to the one of the outer edges (67a) of the light-blocking wall (67) in the widthwise direction, the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) and the one of the outer edges (67a) of the light-blocking wall (67) defining a second width (W2) therebetween that is greater than the first width (W1) in the widthwise direction;
- the light-blocking wall (67) includes a light-transmission portion (66) configured to transmit light, the light-transmission portion extending in the widthwise direction;
- the light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) is configured to block light traveling in the widthwise direction at least one of: during insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) into the cartridge-attachment section (110); and in a state where the printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) is attached to the cartridge-attachment section (110) in the attached posture;
- the interfering surface (67b, 467b, 567b) constitutes a front surface of the light-blocking wall (67, 467, 567) facing frontward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the light-blocking wall (67) optionally comprising: a sloped surface (67d) sloping relative to the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture; and an upper surface (67c) facing upward in attached posture, the sloped surface (67d) connecting the interfering surface (67b) and the upper surface (67c) of the light-blocking wall (67), the sloped surface (67d) facing upward and frontward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture;
- the printing-fluid cartridge (230), further comprises a protrusion (285) positioned frontward relative to the light-blocking wall (267) in the insertion direction in the attached posture, the protrusion (285) including the interfering surface (285b), the protrusion (285) optionally being made of a material configured to transmit light;
- the printing-fluid cartridge (530) further comprises a protrusion (583) disposed at the upper surface (539) and supporting the electrical interface (64, 65), the electrical interface (64, 65) being positioned upward relative to the upper surface (539) in the attached posture, the light-blocking wall (567) being positioned frontward relative to the protrusion (583) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, wherein the light-blocking wall (567) is connected to the protrusion (583);
- the housing (31, 331) comprises an upper cover (31U, 331U) defining the upper surface (39, 339) in the attached posture, the upper cover (31U, 331U) being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33) in the attached posture, and wherein the light-blocking wall (67, 267) is formed integrally with the upper cover (31U, 331U); and
- the light-blocking wall (67, 437) is disposed at the upper surface (39, 439, 539) and includes the interfering surface (67b, 467b).
- 5. The printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330) as claimed in any
preceding claim 1, wherein the housing (31, 331) comprises an upper cover (31U, 331U) defining the upper surface (39, 339) in the attached posture, the upper cover (31U, 331) being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33) in the attached posture,
wherein the interfering surface (67b, 285b) extends upward from the upper cover (31U, 331U) in the attached posture. - 6. The printing-fluid cartridge (30K) as claimed in any preceding claim, wherein the interfering surface (67bK) and the electrical interface (64, 65) are arranged at different positions from each other in the widthwise direction.
- 7. The printing-fluid cartridge (30) as claimed in any preceding claim, further comprising at least one of:
- a closing member (77) configured to close the supply hole (71), a distance between the interfering surface (67b) and the closing member (77) in the insertion direction (51) is shorter than a distance between the projection (108) and a tip end (102E) of a tube (102) provided at the cartridge-attachment section (110) in the insertion direction (51); and
- a locking surface (151, 451) positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33) and configured to contact a lock portion (145) provided at the cartridge-attachment section (110), the locking surface (151, 451) facing rearward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, wherein a distance between the interfering surface (67b, 67bM) and the locking surface (151, 451) in the insertion direction (51) is longer than a distance between the projection (108) and the lock portion (145) in the insertion direction (51).
- 8. The printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330) as claimed in any preceding claim, wherein the housing (31, 331) comprises at least one of:
- an upper cover (31U, 331U) defining the upper surface (39, 339) in the attached posture, the upper cover (31U, 331U) being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33) in the attached posture; and a locking surface (151) provided at the upper cover (31U, 331U) and configured to contact a lock portion (145) provided at the cartridge-attachment section (110), the locking surface (151) facing rearward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the locking surface (151) having an upper end (151U) in the attached posture, wherein the electrical interface (64, 65) is positioned downward and frontward in the insertion direction (51) relative to the upper end (151U) of the locking surface (151) in the attached posture; and
- a case (31L, 331L) defining the storage chamber (32, 33) therein; and
- an upper cover (31U, 331U) attached to the case and defining the upper surface (39, 339) in the attached posture, the upper cover (31U, 331U) being positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33) in the attached posture, the electrical interface (64, 65) and the interfering surface (67a, 285b) being disposed at the upper cover (31U, 331U).
- 9. A set of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) as claimed in any one of
claims 1 to 8, the printing-fluid cartridges (30) comprising a first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) and a second printing-fluid cartridge (30M),
wherein:- the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) stores printing fluid of a first type and the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) stores printing fluid of a second type different from the first type;
- the upper surface (39) of each of the printing-fluid cartridges (30) has a first outer edge (38) and a second outer edge (37) opposite to each other in the widthwise direction; and
- the interfering surface (67bC) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) is positioned closer to the first outer edge (38) in the widthwise direction than the interfering surface (67bM) of the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) is to the first outer edge (38) in the widthwise direction.
- 10. The set of the printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 9, the printing-fluid cartridges (30) further comprising a third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) storing printing fluid of a third type different from the first type and the second type,
wherein:- each of the printing-fluid cartridges (30) defines an imaginary plane (X2) passing through a center of the electrical interface (64, 65) in the widthwise direction and extending parallel to the insertion direction (51) and the gravitational direction;
- the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) are configured to be inserted respectively into a first insertion space (111C) and a third insertion space (111Y) positioned opposite to each other with respect to a second insertion space (111M) in the widthwise direction, the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) being configured to be inserted into the second insertion space (111M);
- the interfering surface (67bM) of the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) is positioned on the imaginary plane (W2) in the widthwise direction;
- the interfering surface (67bC) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) is positioned offset from the imaginary plane (X2) toward the first outer edge (38) in the widthwise direction; and
- the interfering surface (67bY) of the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) is positioned offset from the imaginary plane (X2) toward the second outer edge (37) in the widthwise direction.
- 11. The set of the printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in
claim 10, the printing-fluid cartridges (30) further comprising a fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) storing printing fluid of a fourth type different from the first type and the second type and the third type,
wherein:- the housing (31K) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) having a width in the widthwise direction that is greater than the width of the housing (31) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) in the widthwise direction;
- the upper surface (39) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) has a third outer edge (38) and a fourth outer edge (37K) opposite to each other in the widthwise direction, the third outer edge (38) of the upper surface (39) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) corresponding to the first outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y), the fourth outer edge (37K) of the upper surface of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) being positioned farther away from the imaginary plane (X2) than the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) is from the imaginary plane (X2) in the widthwise direction; and
- the interfering surface (67bK) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) is arranged opposite to the imaginary plane (X2) with respect to a second imaginary plane (X3) in the widthwise direction, the second imaginary plane (X3) being parallel to the imaginary plane (X2) and defining the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) in the widthwise direction.
- 12. A system (1) comprising:
- a plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) as claimed in any one of
claims 1 to 8; and - a printing-fluid consuming apparatus (10) comprising:
- the cartridge-attachment section (110) comprising:
- a plurality of insertion spaces (111) into each of which each of the plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) is configured to be inserted in the insertion direction (51), the plurality of insertion spaces (111) including a first insertion space (111C) and a second insertion space (111M);
- a plurality of tubes (102) each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces (111);
- a plurality of contacts (106) each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces (111), the plurality of contacts (106) including a first contact (106) and a second contact (106), the first contact (106) being disposed in the first insertion space (111C) and the second contact (106) being disposed in the second insertion space (111M);
- a plurality of projections (108) each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces (111), each of the projections (108) being positioned frontward relative to the corresponding contact (106) in the insertion direction (51) in each of the insertion spaces (111), the plurality of projections (108) including a first projection (108C) and a second projection (108M), the first projection (108C) being disposed in the first insertion space (111C) and the second projection (108M) being disposed in the second insertion space (111M), a relative position between the first projection (108C) and the first contact (106) in the widthwise direction in the first insertion space (111C) being different from a relative position between the second projection (108M) and the second contact (106M) in the widthwise direction in the second insertion space (111M); and
- a plurality of optical sensors (113) each disposed in each of the plurality of insertion spaces (111), each of the optical sensors (113) being positioned frontward relative to the corresponding projection (108) in the insertion direction (51) in each of the insertion spaces (111); and
- a determiner (117) configured to determine one of types of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) and existence of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) inserted into the respective insertion spaces (111) based on signals outputted from the respective optical sensors (113).
- a plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) as claimed in any one of
- 13. The system (1) as claimed in
claim 12, wherein the printing-fluid cartridges (30) comprises a first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) and a second printing-fluid cartridge (30M), the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) being configured to be inserted into the first insertion space (111C) and the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) being configured to be inserted into the second insertion space (111M),- wherein each of the plurality of projections (108) includes a pair of opposing walls (118) and a slit (119) provided between the opposing walls (118) in the widthwise direction, the first projection (108C) including a first slit (119C) and the second projection (108M) including a second slit (119M), a relative position between the first slit (119C) and the first contact (106) in the widthwise direction in the first insertion space (111C) being different from a relative position between the second slit (119M) and the second contact (106M) in the widthwise direction in the second insertion space (111M),
- wherein the opposing walls of the first projection (108C) is configured to abut against the interfering surface of the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) during insertion of the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) into the first insertion space (111C) until the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) becomes the attached posture; and
- wherein the first slit (119C) of the first projection (108C) is configured to allow the interfering surface of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) to pass through the first slit (119C) during insertion of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) into the first insertion space (111C) until the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) becomes the attached posture.
- 14. The system (1) as claimed in
claim 12 depending on claim 4, wherein the light-transmission portion (66) is configured to transmit light emitted from the corresponding optical sensor (113). - 15. The system (1) as claimed in
claim 12, wherein at least one of:- the cartridge-attachment section (110) further comprises an opening (112) through which the plurality of printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) is allowed to be inserted into the corresponding plurality of insertion spaces (111); a cover (114) movable between a closing position closing the opening (112) and an opening position exposing the opening (112); and a cover sensor (115) configured to detect that the cover (114) is in the closing position and output a detection signal indicative of the cover (114) being at the closing position, wherein, upon receipt of the detection signal from the cover sensor (115), the determiner (117) is configured to detect one of types of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) and existence of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) inserted into the corresponding plurality of insertion spaces (111) based on signals outputted from the respective optical sensors (113);
- the plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges comprises a first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) configured to the inserted into the first insertion space (111C), wherein the supply portion (34) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) and the tube (102) of the second insertion space (111M) are separated from each other in the insertion direction in a state where the interfering surface (67bC) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) abuts against the projection (108M) provided in the second insertion space (111M) during the insertion of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) into the second insertion space (111M); and
- the plurality of the printing-fluid cartridges comprises a first printing-fluid cartridge (630M) configured to the inserted into the first insertion space (111M), the first printing-fluid cartridges (630M) comprising a locking surface (451) positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33) in the attached posture, wherein the cartridge-attachment section (110) further comprises a lock portion (145) configured to engage the locking surface (451) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (630M) in the attached posture, and wherein the supply portion (34) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (630M) and the tube (102) of the second insertion space (111C) are connected to each other and the locking surface (451) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (630M) is separated from the lock portion (145) in the insertion direction (51) in a state where the interfering surface (67bM) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (630M) abuts against the projection (108C) provided at the second insertion space (111C) during the insertion of the first printing-fluid cartridge (630M) into the second insertion space (111C).
Claims (15)
- A set of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) comprising a first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) and a second printing-fluid cartridge (30M), each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) configured to be inserted into a prescribed insertion space (111) of a cartridge-attachment section (110) in an insertion direction (51) crossing a gravitational direction (53) to be attached to the cartridge-attachment section (110) in an attached posture, and each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) comprising:a housing (31, 331, 431, 531) defining a width in a widthwise direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (51) and the gravitational direction in the attached posture, the housing (31, 331, 431, 531) comprising:a storage chamber (32, 33, 432) configured to store printing fluid therein; andan upper surface (39, 339, 439, 539) positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33, 432), facing upward in the attached posture and having a first outer edge (38) and a second outer edge (37) opposite to each other in the widthwise direction;a supply portion (34, 434) having a supply hole (71, 471), the printing fluid being configured to flow out of the storage chamber (32, 33, 432) through the supply hole (71, 471);an electrical interface (64, 65, 464) disposed at the upper surface (39, 339, 439, 539) and facing upward in the attached posture; andan interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) positioned upward relative to the storage chamber (32, 33, 342) in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) extending in the widthwise direction in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) being positioned downward and frontward in the insertion direction (51) relative to the electrical interface (64, 65, 464) in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) being configured to abut against a projection (108) provided at another insertion space (111) different from the prescribed insertion space (111) of the cartridge-attachment section (110) during an insertion of the printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) into the another insertion space (111); wherein:the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) stores printing fluid of a first type and the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) stores printing fluid of a second type different from the first type; andthe interfering surface (67bC) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) is positioned closer to the first outer edge (38) in the widthwise direction than the interfering surface (67bM) of the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) is to the first outer edge (38) in the widthwise direction.
- The set of the printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 1, the printing-fluid cartridges (30) further comprising a third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) storing printing fluid of a third type different from the first type and the second type,
wherein:each of the printing-fluid cartridges (30) defines an imaginary plane (X2) passing through a center of the electrical interface (64, 65) in the widthwise direction and extending parallel to the insertion direction (51) and the gravitational direction;the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) are configured to be inserted respectively into a first insertion space (111C) and a third insertion space (111Y) positioned opposite to each other with respect to a second insertion space (111M) in the widthwise direction, the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) being configured to be inserted into the second insertion space (111M);the interfering surface (67bM) of the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) is positioned on the imaginary plane (W2) in the widthwise direction;the interfering surface (67bC) of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C) is positioned offset from the imaginary plane (X2) toward the first outer edge (38) in the widthwise direction; andthe interfering surface (67bY) of the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) is positioned offset from the imaginary plane (X2) toward the second outer edge (37) in the widthwise direction. - The set of the printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 2, the printing-fluid cartridges (30) further comprising a fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) storing printing fluid of a fourth type different from the first type and the second type and the third type,
wherein:the housing (31K) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) having a width in the widthwise direction that is greater than the width of the housing (31) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) in the widthwise direction;the upper surface (39) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) has a third outer edge (38) and a fourth outer edge (37K) opposite to each other in the widthwise direction, the third outer edge (38) of the upper surface (39) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) corresponding to the first outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y), the fourth outer edge (37K) of the upper surface of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) being positioned farther away from the imaginary plane (X2) than the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) is from the imaginary plane (X2) in the widthwise direction; andthe interfering surface (67bK) of the fourth printing-fluid cartridge (30K) is arranged opposite to the imaginary plane (X2) with respect to a second imaginary plane (X3) in the widthwise direction, the second imaginary plane (X3) being parallel to the imaginary plane (X2) and defining the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) of each of the first printing-fluid cartridge (30C), the second printing-fluid cartridge (30M) and the third printing-fluid cartridge (30Y) in the widthwise direction. - The set of printing fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 1, 2 or 3, wherein the housing (3, 33, 431, 531) of each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) comprises:a front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) facing frontward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture; anda rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541) away from the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) in a removal direction (52) opposite to the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541) facing rearward in the attached posture, the storage chamber (32, 33, 432) being positioned between the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) and the rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture.
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 4, wherein, in each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M), the upper surface (39, 339, 439, 539) extends between the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540) and the rear surface (41, 341, 441, 541).
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 4 or 5, wherein, in each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M), the supply portion (34, 434) is provided at the front surface (40, 49, 340, 349, 440, 540), the printing-fluid being configured to flow out of the storage chamber (32, 33, 432) through the supply hole (71, 47) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture.
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in any preceding claim, wherein the housing (31) of each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) further comprises a respective inner surface (40R) that defines a front edge of the respective storage chamber (32, 33) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the interfering surface (67b) being positioned rearward relative to the inner surface (40R) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture.
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in any preceding claim, wherein each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) further comprises a respective light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) disposed at the respective housing (31, 331, 431, 531), the light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) being positioned rearward relative to the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture, the light-blocking wall (67, 267, 467, 567) including a light-blocking surface (67a, 267a, D) extending in the insertion direction (51) and the gravitational direction (53) in the attached posture.
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 8, wherein the interfering surface (67b) and the light-blocking wall (67) are aligned with each other in the insertion direction (51).
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 8, wherein the interfering surface (67b) has a first width (W1) in the widthwise direction,
wherein the light-blocking wall (67) has outer edges (67a) opposite to each other in the widthwise direction, the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) being positioned closer to one of the outer edges (67a) of the light-blocking wall (67) than the first outer edge (38) is to the one of the outer edges (67a) of the light-blocking wall (67) in the widthwise direction, the second outer edge (37) of the upper surface (39) and the one of the outer edges (67a) of the light-blocking wall (67) defining a second width (W2) therebetween that is greater than the first width (W1) in the widthwise direction. - The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 8, wherein the light-blocking wall (67) includes a light-transmission portion (66) configured to transmit light, the light-transmission portion extending in the widthwise direction.
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 8, wherein the interfering surface (67b) constitutes a front surface of the light-blocking wall (67) facing frontward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture.
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 12, wherein the light-blocking walls (67) comprises:a sloped surface (67d) sloping relative to the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture; andan upper surface (67c) facing upward in attached posture, the sloped surface (67d) connecting the interfering surface (67b) to the upper surface (67c) of the light-blocking wall (67), the sloped surface (67d) facing upward and frontward in the insertion direction (51) in the attached posture.
- The set of printing-fluid cartridges (30) as claimed in claim 8, wherein at least one of:the light-blocking wall (67) is disposed at the upper surface (39) and includes the interfering surface (67b); andthe interfering surface (67bK) and the electrical interface (64, 65) are arranged at different positions from each other in the widthwise direction.
- The set of the printing-fluid cartridges (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) as claimed in any preceding claim, wherein the housing of each respective printing-fluid cartridge (30, 230, 330, 430, 530, 630M) comprises:a lower case (31U) defining the storage chamber (32, 33, 432); andan upper cover (31U) having the interfering surface (67b, 285b, 467b, 567b) and fitted to the lower case (31U).
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP20159598.0A EP3695974B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Printing-fluid cartridge, set of printing-fluid cartridges, and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
EP19167667.5A EP3524434B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Set of printing-fluid cartridges |
EP20159598.0A EP3695974B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Printing-fluid cartridge, set of printing-fluid cartridges, and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus |
EP17184052.3A EP3437876B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | System including a plurality of printing-fluid cartridges and a printing-fluid consuming apparatus |
Related Parent Applications (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP19167667.5A Division-Into EP3524434B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Set of printing-fluid cartridges |
EP19167667.5A Division EP3524434B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Set of printing-fluid cartridges |
EP17184052.3A Division EP3437876B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | System including a plurality of printing-fluid cartridges and a printing-fluid consuming apparatus |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
EP3695974A1 true EP3695974A1 (en) | 2020-08-19 |
EP3695974B1 EP3695974B1 (en) | 2023-05-17 |
Family
ID=59501340
Family Applications (3)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP19167667.5A Active EP3524434B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Set of printing-fluid cartridges |
EP17184052.3A Active EP3437876B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | System including a plurality of printing-fluid cartridges and a printing-fluid consuming apparatus |
EP20159598.0A Active EP3695974B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Printing-fluid cartridge, set of printing-fluid cartridges, and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus |
Family Applications Before (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
EP19167667.5A Active EP3524434B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | Set of printing-fluid cartridges |
EP17184052.3A Active EP3437876B1 (en) | 2017-07-31 | 2017-07-31 | System including a plurality of printing-fluid cartridges and a printing-fluid consuming apparatus |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (3) | EP3524434B1 (en) |
ES (1) | ES2829409T3 (en) |
Families Citing this family (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
WO2023093400A1 (en) * | 2021-11-25 | 2023-06-01 | 珠海纳思达企业管理有限公司 | Ink cartridge |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2007261286A (en) | 2002-03-29 | 2007-10-11 | Seiko Epson Corp | Ink cartridge and recording apparatus |
US20130050358A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Printing fluid cartridge, printing apparatus, and use of printing fluid cartridge |
US20130050359A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Printing fluid cartridge, printing apparatus, and use of printing fluid cartridge |
US20130063532A1 (en) * | 2011-09-09 | 2013-03-14 | Masayuki Takata | Recording apparatus and printing fluid cartridge set |
Family Cites Families (1)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
ES2755927T3 (en) * | 2015-07-01 | 2020-04-24 | Brother Ind Ltd | Liquid consuming apparatus including a liquid cartridge |
-
2017
- 2017-07-31 EP EP19167667.5A patent/EP3524434B1/en active Active
- 2017-07-31 EP EP17184052.3A patent/EP3437876B1/en active Active
- 2017-07-31 EP EP20159598.0A patent/EP3695974B1/en active Active
- 2017-07-31 ES ES19167667T patent/ES2829409T3/en active Active
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2007261286A (en) | 2002-03-29 | 2007-10-11 | Seiko Epson Corp | Ink cartridge and recording apparatus |
US20130050358A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Printing fluid cartridge, printing apparatus, and use of printing fluid cartridge |
US20130050359A1 (en) * | 2011-08-30 | 2013-02-28 | Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Printing fluid cartridge, printing apparatus, and use of printing fluid cartridge |
US20130063532A1 (en) * | 2011-09-09 | 2013-03-14 | Masayuki Takata | Recording apparatus and printing fluid cartridge set |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP3437876A1 (en) | 2019-02-06 |
EP3524434B1 (en) | 2020-09-09 |
EP3437876B1 (en) | 2019-12-18 |
ES2829409T3 (en) | 2021-05-31 |
EP3695974B1 (en) | 2023-05-17 |
EP3524434A1 (en) | 2019-08-14 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US11590758B2 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge having interfering surface, and set of the printing-fluid cartridges | |
US11020978B2 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge including electrical interface and locking surface | |
US11884077B2 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge including contact surface for providing positioning of the printing-fluid cartridge | |
EP3437879B1 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge and system using the same | |
AU2017426463B2 (en) | Printing fluid cartridge and system using the same | |
EP3524434B1 (en) | Set of printing-fluid cartridges | |
AU2017426461B2 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge, set of printing-fluid cartridges, and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus | |
EP3437878B1 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus | |
EP3437873B1 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus | |
NZ757337A (en) | Optical acoustic sensing system and method | |
WO2019026107A1 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus | |
WO2019026103A1 (en) | Printing-fluid cartridge and system including the printing-fluid cartridge and printing-fluid consuming apparatus | |
NZ757337B2 (en) | Fire extinguisher with internal mixing and gas cartridge |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
PUAI | Public reference made under article 153(3) epc to a published international application that has entered the european phase |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009012 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE APPLICATION HAS BEEN PUBLISHED |
|
AC | Divisional application: reference to earlier application |
Ref document number: 3437876 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P Ref document number: 3524434 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: A1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
AX | Request for extension of the european patent |
Extension state: BA ME |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE |
|
17P | Request for examination filed |
Effective date: 20210129 |
|
RBV | Designated contracting states (corrected) |
Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20220805 |
|
GRAJ | Information related to disapproval of communication of intention to grant by the applicant or resumption of examination proceedings by the epo deleted |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSDIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: REQUEST FOR EXAMINATION WAS MADE |
|
INTC | Intention to grant announced (deleted) | ||
GRAP | Despatch of communication of intention to grant a patent |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR1 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: GRANT OF PATENT IS INTENDED |
|
INTG | Intention to grant announced |
Effective date: 20230105 |
|
GRAS | Grant fee paid |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: EPIDOSNIGR3 |
|
GRAA | (expected) grant |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009210 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: THE PATENT HAS BEEN GRANTED |
|
AC | Divisional application: reference to earlier application |
Ref document number: 3437876 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P Ref document number: 3524434 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: P |
|
AK | Designated contracting states |
Kind code of ref document: B1 Designated state(s): AL AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HR HU IE IS IT LI LT LU LV MC MK MT NL NO PL PT RO RS SE SI SK SM TR |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: GB Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: EP |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R096 Ref document number: 602017068932 Country of ref document: DE |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: IE Ref legal event code: FG4D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: AT Ref legal event code: REF Ref document number: 1568251 Country of ref document: AT Kind code of ref document: T Effective date: 20230615 |
|
P01 | Opt-out of the competence of the unified patent court (upc) registered |
Effective date: 20230529 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: LT Ref legal event code: MG9D |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: NL Ref legal event code: MP Effective date: 20230517 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: AT Ref legal event code: MK05 Ref document number: 1568251 Country of ref document: AT Kind code of ref document: T Effective date: 20230517 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: PT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230918 Ref country code: NO Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230817 Ref country code: NL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: ES Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: AT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: RS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: PL Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: LV Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: LT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: IS Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230917 Ref country code: HR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: GR Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230818 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SM Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: SK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: RO Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: EE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: DK Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: CZ Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: DE Ref legal event code: R097 Ref document number: 602017068932 Country of ref document: DE |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: MC Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: MC Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: CH Ref legal event code: PL |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: BE Ref legal event code: MM Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: LU Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PLBE | No opposition filed within time limit |
Free format text: ORIGINAL CODE: 0009261 |
|
STAA | Information on the status of an ep patent application or granted ep patent |
Free format text: STATUS: NO OPPOSITION FILED WITHIN TIME LIMIT |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: LU Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
26N | No opposition filed |
Effective date: 20240220 |
|
REG | Reference to a national code |
Ref country code: IE Ref legal event code: MM4A |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: CH Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: SI Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: IT Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF FAILURE TO SUBMIT A TRANSLATION OF THE DESCRIPTION OR TO PAY THE FEE WITHIN THE PRESCRIBED TIME-LIMIT Effective date: 20230517 Ref country code: BE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: IE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: GB Payment date: 20240613 Year of fee payment: 8 |
|
PG25 | Lapsed in a contracting state [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: IE Free format text: LAPSE BECAUSE OF NON-PAYMENT OF DUE FEES Effective date: 20230731 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: FR Payment date: 20240613 Year of fee payment: 8 |
|
PGFP | Annual fee paid to national office [announced via postgrant information from national office to epo] |
Ref country code: DE Payment date: 20240613 Year of fee payment: 8 |